Casio | EX-ZR65 | User's Guide | Casio EX-ZR65 User's Guide

Casio EX-ZR65 User's Guide
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻧﺸﻜﺮﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﺍءﻙ ﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ‪ CASIO‬ﻫﺬﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻼ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‬
‫• ﻟﻺﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ‪ EXILIM‬ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻤﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪http://www.exilim.com/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻓﺮﺍﻍ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻋﺒﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ )‪(NP-160‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ )‪(AD-C53U‬‬
‫ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ*‬
‫ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﻫﻨﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫* ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻢ ﺑﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺃﻭﻻً!‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻛﺘﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺖ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻛﺘﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻨﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻻﺣﻈﺖ ﺃﻱ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺗﺴﺎﺅﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺎﻃﺊ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳُﺤﻈﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﺍء ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺠﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﻱ‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻛﺘﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺼﺮﻳﺢ ﻣﻦ‬
‫‪ CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD.‬ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﺇﻻ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ‪ CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD.‬ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﻣﻔﻘﻮﺩﺓ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻜﺒﺪﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺃﻧﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺛﺎﻟﺚ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻄﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ‪ CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD.‬ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﻣﻔﻘﻮﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺒﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻨﺸﺄ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪.EXILIM Connect‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ‪ CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD.‬ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﻣﻔﻘﻮﺩﺓ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺤﺪﻭﺙ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻄﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺇﺻﻼﺡ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻭﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫‪LCD‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺑﻜﺴﻼﺕ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ .٪٩٩٫٩٩‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ﺟﺪﺍً ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻦ ﺗﻀﺊ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺒﻘﻰ ﻣﻀﻴﺌﺔ ﻃﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﻭﻳُﻌﺰﻯ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﻭﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﻳﻪ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﻳﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪2.....................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ! ‪3..........................................................................................‬‬
‫❚❙ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ‬
‫‪10‬‬
‫❚❙ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ‬
‫‪11‬‬
‫❚❙ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪15‬‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ CASIO‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ‪15 .........................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪17 .......................................................................................‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪19 ................................................................. .‬‬
‫❚ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪19 ............................................................................................‬‬
‫❚ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪20 ...............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪25 ..............................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪26 .........................................................................................‬‬
‫❚ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ‪26 ..................................................................................‬‬
‫❚ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪27 ........................................................................................‬‬
‫❚ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ )ﺑﺪء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ( ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ‪28 ..................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪29 ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪30 .............................................................................‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ‪31 ..............................................................................................‬‬
‫❚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪31 .................................................................................‬‬
‫❚ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪32 ................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪35 ............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪36 ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪37 ................................................................................‬‬
‫❚❙ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫‪39‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪39 ......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ‪40 ......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ‪) ...............................................................‬ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ(‪41 .....‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ‪) ............................................................‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ(‪42 .....‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ‪) ........................................................‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ(‪44 .....‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪46 .....(ISO) .......................................................................... ISO‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﺭﺍﺋﻌﺔ ‪47 .....(Make-up) ............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪) .....................................................‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ(‪48 .....‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪) ............................................................................‬ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‪49 .....‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ‪) ..........................................................................‬ﻗﻴﺎﺱ(‪51 .....‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ‪52 ................................................................................‬‬
‫❚ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ‪53 ..............................................................‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫❚ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ‪)................................................................‬ﺯﻭﻭﻡ )‪55 ......((SR‬‬
‫❚ ﺗﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺃﻭﺿﺢ ‪) .................................‬ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ‪ SR‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ(‪56 ......‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪56 .....(CS) .................................................................‬‬
‫❚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻻﻗﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪56 .............................................................‬‬
‫❚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ‪58 ......................................................‬‬
‫❚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪60 ......(AF CS) ......................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ‪) ...........................................‬ﻻﻗﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ(‪61 .....‬‬
‫❚ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻻﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪) ........................................................‬ﻻﻗﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ(‪63 ......‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻓﻨﻴﺔ ‪64 .....(Art Shot) .......................................................‬‬
‫❚ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪) ...................... HDR Art‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻠﻔﻲ ‪) ......................................‬ﻓﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺳﻴﻠﻔﻲ ‪) ...........................................‬ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‬
‫‪66 ......(HDR‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻠﻔﻲ(‪67 .....‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻠﻔﻲ(‪68 .....‬‬
‫❚ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻠﻔﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ‪68 .............................................................‬‬
‫❚ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻠﻔﻲ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺳﻴﻠﻔﻲ ‪68 ..........................................................‬‬
‫❚❙ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫‪70‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪70 ...............................................................................................‬‬
‫❚ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪71 .......................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪73 .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪74 ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪) ............................................‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ )ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ((‪76 .....‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪) ......................................................‬ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ(‪78 .....‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪) ...................................................‬ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪81 .....‬‬
‫❚❙‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪BEST SHOT‬‬
‫‪82‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪82 ....................................................................... BEST SHOT‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﺭﺍﺋﻌﺔ ‪84 .....(Make-up) ............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻮﻥ ﺑﺸﺮﺓ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ‪) .....................................................‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ‪84 .....(Make-up‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ‪85 ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﻤﻀﺎﺩ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ‪) ..................‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﻤﻀﺎﺩ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ(‪86 .....‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﺎﺗﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻡ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪)..................‬ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻟﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ(‪87 .....‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻴﻞ‪88 .....(HDR) .................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ ‪) ......................................‬ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ(‪89 .....‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ ‪) ................‬ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ(‪90 .....‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ‪) ..........................................................‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ(‪91 .....‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﺎﺋﻖ ‪) ..............................‬ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ(‪93 .....‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ‪) ........................................‬ﺧﺮﺝ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ‪96 .....(HDMI‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫❚❙ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫)‪(REC MENU‬‬
‫‪98‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪98 ...................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪99 .....(CS) .................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ‪) .......................................‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ(‪99 .....‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ‪) ...........................................‬ﻻﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ(‪100 ...‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‪).........................................‬ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ(‪100 ...‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪) ....................................... [6‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ‪ /‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ(‪101 ...‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ‪) ...............................................................‬ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ(‪102 ...‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪) .....................................................‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ(‪102 ...‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ‪) ............................................................‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ(‪102 ...‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪102 ...(ISO) .......................................................................... ISO‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺣﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪) ................................................‬ﺣﺪ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻊ(‪103 ...‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ‪) ........................................................‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ(‪104 ...‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪) ................................................‬ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪104 .. (AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ‪) ................................................‬ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ(‪106 ...‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﺭﺍﺋﻌﺔ ‪107 ...(Make-up) ............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ‪ AF) ..............................‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ(‪107 ...‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ‪) ..........................................................................‬ﻗﻴﺎﺱ(‪107 ...‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪) ..................................‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻀﺎﺩ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ(‪108 ...‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪) ...........................................................‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪109 ...‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ‪) ........................................................‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪111 ....‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪) .......................................................‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪111 ....‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪) ....................................................................‬ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ(‪113 ...‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪) .......................................................................‬ﺣﺪّﺓ(‪113 ...‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪) ...................................................................‬ﺇﺷﺒﺎﻉ(‪113 ...‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪) .....................................................................‬ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ(‪114 ...‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪) ....................................................................‬ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‪114 ...‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ‪) ..............................................................‬ﺯﻭﻭﻡ )‪114 ...((SR‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ‪) ............................................‬ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ(‪114 ...‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺗﻌﺰﻳﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪) ............................‬ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺗﻌﺰﻳﺰ ‪115 ...(AF‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪) ............ HDR Art‬ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ )ﺭﺳﻢ ‪115 ...((HDR‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺡ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪)...............................‬ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺡ(‪115 ...‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪) ..................................................................‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ(‪116 ...‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪) ...........................................................‬ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ(‪116 ...‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪) ...........................................‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‪117 ...‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪) ........................................................‬ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ(‪119 ...‬‬
‫❚❙ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫‪120‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪120 ..........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪120 .............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ ‪121 .................................................................................‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪122 ...........................................................................‬‬
‫❚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪123 ..............................................................................‬‬
‫❚ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪125 ............................................................................................‬‬
‫❚ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪126 .....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪127 ............................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪127 ...................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ‪128 ....................................................‬‬
‫❚❙ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء‬
‫)‪130 (PLAY MENU‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ‪) .......................................‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ(‪130 ...‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ‪).................................................‬ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ(‪130 ...‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪) ...........................................‬ﺇﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ(‪131 ...‬‬
‫❚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء‬
‫❚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء‬
‫❚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ‪) ...........................................................‬ﺇﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪131 ....‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺠﻤﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ‪) ..............................................‬ﺇﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ(‪133 ....‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪) ..........................................................‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺮﺍﺯ(‪134 ....‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪) ..............................................‬ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫❚ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ(‪135 ...‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪137 .............................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪) .........................................................‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪138 ...‬‬
‫ﻟﺪﻣﺞ ﻣﻘﻄﻌﻲ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪) ...................................................................‬ﺩﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪140 ...‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪141 ...(MOTION PRINT) .....................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪) ....................................................................‬ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ(‪141 ...‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ‪) ............................................................‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ(‪142 ...‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‪) ...............................................................‬ﺳﻄﻮﻉ(‪143 ...‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪) .............................................................‬ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪143 ...(DPOF‬‬
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ ‪) .....................................................................‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ(‪144 ...‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪) .......................................................‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ /‬ﻭﻗﺖ(‪145 ...‬‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪).................................................................................‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ(‪146 ...‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪) ....................................................................‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ(‪146 ...‬‬
‫ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪) ..............................................................................‬ﺗﺴﻮﻳﺔ(‪147 ...‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪) ..................................................................................‬ﻧﺴﺦ(‪147 ...‬‬
‫ﺩﻣﺞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ‪) ................‬ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻻﻗﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ(‪148 ...‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻻﻗﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ‪) .....................................................‬ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ(‪148 ...‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻻﻗﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ‪) .....................................................‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ(‪148 ...‬‬
‫❚❙ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ )ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ(‬
‫‪149‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ‪149 .................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ‪152 ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ‪154 ......................................‬‬
‫❚ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ EXILIM Connect‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ‪154 ...................................................‬‬
‫❚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‪155 ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻛﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪) ..........‬ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻘﺘﺮﻥ ‪................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ(‪158 ...‬‬
‫)ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‪159 ...‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ(‪161 ...‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪)........‬ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪) .......................................................‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ(‪162 ...‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ‪163 .....................................................................‬‬
‫❚‬
‫❚‬
‫❚‬
‫❚‬
‫❚‬
‫❚‬
‫❚‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪) ...............................................‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ(‪163 ....‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ‪) ...........................‬ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪164 ....‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪) ............‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪166 ....‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪) .....................‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ(‪166 ....‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ‪) ...........................................‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ(‪167 ....‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ LAN‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ‪) .........................‬ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ‪168 ....(WLAN‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ‪) ................................................‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ(‪169 ....‬‬
‫❚❙ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪170‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪170 ............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ DPOF‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ‪) ..............‬ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪170 ...(DPOF‬‬
‫❚❙ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪174‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪174 ...............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪175 .......................................... Windows‬‬
‫❚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪175 .................................................................‬‬
‫❚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪178 .......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ‬
‫‪179 ...................................................................... Macintosh‬‬
‫❚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪179 ..............................................................‬‬
‫❚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪181 ...............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‪182 .......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪183 .....................................................................................‬‬
‫❚❙ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫)‪185 (SETTING‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪) ...................................................................‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪185 ...(ECO‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪) ................................................................‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ(‪185 ...‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪) ..........................................................‬ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ(‪186 ...‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪) .............................................................‬ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ(‪186 ...‬‬
‫ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ‪) ..............................................................‬ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ(‪187 ...‬‬
‫ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ‪) ............................................‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪187 ...‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺭﻗﻢ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ ﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ‪) .........................................‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ(‪188 ...‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ ‪).............................................................‬ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ(‪188 ...‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪) .....................................‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪189 ...‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪) .....................................‬ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ(‪189 ...‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪189 ...(PLAY) .......................................................................[p‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪) ...............................................................‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ(‪190 ...‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ ‪) ...................................................‬ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻋﺎﻟﻤﻲ(‪190 ...‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪).........................................................................‬ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ(‪191 ...‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ‪) ....................................................................‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ(‪191 ...‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪192 ... (Language) ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻃﺮﻑ ‪) ...............................................HDMI‬ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ‪192 ...(HDMI‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪) ....................................................‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ(‪193 ...‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ‪) ...........................‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪193 ...‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪) ....................................‬ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ(‪193 ...‬‬
‫❚❙ ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪194‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‪194 .........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪202 ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪215 ..............................................................................................‬‬
‫❚ ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪215 ..............................................................................................‬‬
‫❚ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪216 ........................................................................................‬‬
‫❚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﺧﺮ ‪216 ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪217 ....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ‪219 .............................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﺴﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺮﺍﻡ‪222 .....................................................................‬‬
‫❚ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ ‪222 ...........................................................................‬‬
‫❚ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪228 .....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪/‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪230 .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‪233 ...............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﺡ ﻛﻞ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‬
‫‪1234567‬‬
‫‪bm bn bo bp‬‬
‫‪bq‬‬
‫‪br‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪bl‬‬
‫‪bk‬‬
‫‪cm cl ck bt bs‬‬
‫‪ bk‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪(130 ،100‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(70‬‬
‫‪ bl‬ﺣﺎﺟﺰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(203‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ‬
‫‪ bm‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪[MODE‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪(127 ،52 ،32‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪(70 ،39 ،31‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ )ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪(31 ،29‬‬
‫‪) [ON/OFF] 4‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‬
‫‪ bn‬ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪،32 ،29 ،23 ،21‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪(29 ،25‬‬
‫‪(49‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(49‬‬
‫‪ bo‬ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(2‬‬
‫‪ 6‬ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‬
‫‪ bp‬ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻲ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪(115 ،41‬‬
‫‪[HDMI OUT] bq‬‬
‫‪ 7‬ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺧﺮﺝ ‪) HDMI‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ(‬
‫‪ 8‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫‪ 9‬ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(71‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(96‬‬
‫‪ br‬ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ]‪[USB‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪(22 ،20‬‬
‫‪ bs‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪[MENU‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪(98 ،70‬‬
‫‪ bt‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪(35 ،29‬‬
‫‪ ck‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪[SET‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪(98 ،70 ،40‬‬
‫‪ cl‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫)]‪([8] [2] [4] [6‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪(98 ،82 ،70 ،40‬‬
‫‪ cm‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪(31 ،11‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ‬
‫‪ cn‬ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ co‬ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ cp‬ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪(27 ،19‬‬
‫‪cp co cn‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ‬
‫‪10‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻹﻋﻼﻣﻚ ﺩﻭﻣﺎً ﺑﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﺍﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻣﻮﺍﺿﻊ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻌﻠﻴﺎً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ )ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪bk‬‬
‫‪bl‬‬
‫‪bm‬‬
‫‪bn‬‬
‫‪bo‬‬
‫‪bp‬‬
‫‪1 2 34567‬‬
‫‪clckbtbsbrbq‬‬
‫‪cs‬‬
‫‪cr‬‬
‫‪cq‬‬
‫‪cp‬‬
‫‪co‬‬
‫‪cn‬‬
‫‪cm‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(41‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(106‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(31‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪/‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ‬
‫)‪) (SR‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(54‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(70‬‬
‫‪ 6‬ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(230‬‬
‫‪ 7‬ﺣﺠﻢ‪/‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪(111 ،109‬‬
‫‪ 8‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪) (FHD/STD‬ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪/(73 ،70‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ( )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(74‬‬
‫‪ 9‬ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫)ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪ ٣٥‬ﻣﻢ‪) (.‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(53‬‬
‫‪ bk‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(108‬‬
‫‪ bl‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(187‬‬
‫‪ bm‬ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(117‬‬
‫‪ bn‬ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(100‬‬
‫‪ bo‬ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪) Bluetooth‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪/(153‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(163‬‬
‫‪ bp‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ )ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪(191 ،25‬‬
‫‪ bq‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(167‬‬
‫‪ br‬ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(164‬‬
‫‪ bs‬ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(153‬‬
‫‪ bt‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ )ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪(105 ،32‬‬
‫‪ ck‬ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(104‬‬
‫‪ cl‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(24‬‬
‫‪ cm‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(51‬‬
‫‪ cn‬ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(49‬‬
‫‪ co‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(48‬‬
‫‪) Make-up cp‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(47‬‬
‫‪ cq‬ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(46‬‬
‫‪ cr‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(44‬‬
‫‪ cs‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(42‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻭﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺼﺒﺢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )‪ (AE‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﻣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ‬
‫‪11‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ )ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ(‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪234‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ )‪) (CS‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(56‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(31‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(230‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻪ*‪/‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮﺡ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(56‬‬
‫* ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(231‬‬
‫‪ 6‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(56‬‬
‫‪ 7‬ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(58‬‬
‫‪ 8‬ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(56‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪23 4 5‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ )ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(81‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(74‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(70‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(70‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(70‬‬
‫‪ 6‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(70‬‬
‫‪ 7‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪) (FHD/STD‬ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪/(73 ،70‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ( )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(74‬‬
‫‪ 8‬ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(230‬‬
‫‪12‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪bk‬‬
‫‪123 4‬‬
‫‪brbqbpbobnbm bl‬‬
‫‪cn‬‬
‫‪cm‬‬
‫‪cl‬‬
‫‪ck‬‬
‫‪bt‬‬
‫‪bs‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(144‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(109‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪/‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(182‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(111‬‬
‫‪ 6‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(31‬‬
‫‪ 7‬ﺗﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪(164 ،161‬‬
‫‪ 8‬ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(117‬‬
‫‪ 9‬ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(130‬‬
‫‪ bk‬ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪) Bluetooth‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪/(153‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(163‬‬
‫‪ bl‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(191‬‬
‫‪ bm‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(167‬‬
‫‪ bn‬ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(164‬‬
‫‪ bo‬ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(153‬‬
‫‪ bp‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(51‬‬
‫‪ bq‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(142‬‬
‫‪ br‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(24‬‬
‫‪ bs‬ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(49‬‬
‫‪ bt‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(48‬‬
‫‪ ck‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‬
‫‪ cl‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫‪ cm‬ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(46‬‬
‫‪ cn‬ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫)ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪ ٣٥‬ﻣﻢ‪(.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(120‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪) (FHD/STD‬ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪/(73 ،70‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ( )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(74‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(78‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻟﻠﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪13‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺳﺘﺆﺩﻱ ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ (DISP) [8‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫]‪(DISP) [8‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺧﻔﺎء ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (117‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ‬
‫‪14‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ CASIO‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ CASIO‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺑﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﺘﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ١٨٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺗﻴﺔ‪ً .‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺃﺻﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﺃﺳﻬﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻭﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻻﻗﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ 100 ،61 ،18‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 149‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻴﺔ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻘﺘﺮﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ Scene‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 159‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ‬
‫ﻭﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺠﻤﻌﺔ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 133‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ‬
‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻭﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 131‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪15‬‬
‫ﻓﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺳﻴﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 67‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻸﺣﺪﺍﺙ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﺑﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻟﺘﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻤﺎﺛﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 78‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ‪) Make-up‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ‪(Make-up‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ‪) Make-up‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ‪(Make-up‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪ ،‬ﻛﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺑﺸﺮﺓ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 84‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ ﻭﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 31‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪16‬‬
‫ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٨٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻓﺘﺤﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ١٨٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫• ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 189‬ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﺭﺍ ﻛﻲ ﻻ ﺗﻨﺤﺸﺮ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻛﻦ ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺸﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﻼﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺧﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪17‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪...‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺴﻬﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺑﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺑﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻘﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺑﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ‪ ١٨٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪18‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻً‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺤﻦ )‪ (NP-160‬ﻣﻦ ‪ CASIO‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺭﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ CASIO‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ )ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺩﻓﻌﻚ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﻳﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺰ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﺟﺰ‬
‫ﻟﻴﺲ ﺟﻴﺪًﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪19‬‬
‫ﺟﻴﺪًﺍ‬
‫ﺷﻌﺎﺭ‬
‫‪CASIO‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [ON/OFF‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﺟﺰ‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻏﻼﻕ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (10‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫]‪) [ON/OFF‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﺸﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻴﻠﺘﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪USB‬‬
‫• ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻦ‪(.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺸﺤﻦ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ :‬ﺳﺎﻋﺘﺎﻥ ﻭ‪ ٤٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ‬
‫]‪[USB‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫)ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‬
‫‪USB‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ )‪(AD-C53U‬‬
‫‪ u‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ )‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺟﻪ‬
‫ﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪20‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.215‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ]‪ [USB‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺸﻌﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭﻩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻪ ﺑﺄﻣﺎﻥ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﻮء ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺧﻠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻞ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﻛﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [ON/OFF‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬
‫‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻬﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺼﺒﺢ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﺳﺎﺧ ًﻨﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻭﻻ‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻄﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﻳﻀﻲء ﺑﺎﻷﺣﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺑﺎﻷﺣﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(215‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪21‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺸﺤﻦ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ‪ USB‬ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ )‪.(2 ،1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫)ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‬
‫‪USB‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫]‪[USB‬‬
‫‪USB‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫)ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‬
‫‪ u‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ )‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [ON/OFF‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺛﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻭﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻐﺮﺍﻕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.215‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺸﺤﻦ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪.USB‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻨﻄﻔﺊ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٦٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺘﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺮﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ USB‬ﻧﺸﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻹﻣﺪﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪22‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﻳﻀﻲء ﺑﺎﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪،‬‬
‫]ﻳﻀﻲء‪/‬ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ[‬
‫ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺑﺎﻷﺣﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻐﺮﺍﻕ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻭﻗ ًﺘﺎ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(215‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪،‬‬
‫]ﻳﻀﻲء ﺑﺎﻷﺧﻀﺮ[‬
‫ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫• ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﺬﻳﻦ ﺗﻢ ﺷﺮﺣﻬﻤﺎ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )‪ (NP-160‬ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳًﺎ )‪ .(BC-110L‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺣﺎﺩﺙ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺷﺤﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB 2.0‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﻀﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ‪ USB‬ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻗﺪﻳﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻋﻄﻞ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺧﻠﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻀﻤﻮ ًﻧﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ‪ .‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺠﻌﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻋﺒﺮ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪.USB‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺰﺍﻝ ﺩﺍﻓﺌﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﺩﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﺘﺒﺮﺩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻎ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﻔﻴﻒ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻭﺇﻥ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ‪ ،‬ﻳُﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺄﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﻣﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﻭﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﻳﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﺸﺤﻦ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺧﺎﻃﺊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪23‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﻔﺎﺩ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻴﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺃﺣﻤﺮ‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺃﺣﻤﺮ‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻤﻜ ًﻨﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ ٢٠‬ﻳﻮﻡ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻔﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻤﻄﺎﻟﺒﺘﻚ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(191‬‬
‫• ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 235‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) “ECO‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (185‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ? )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(49‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (189‬ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (188‬ﻟﻠﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺴﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ”ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ“ ﻟـ ”‪ AF‬ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(107‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪24‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﺧﺎﻃﺌﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻃﺮﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗُﺒﺎﻉ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [ON/OFF‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [ON/OFF‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ ١٠ :‬ﻳﻮﻟﻴﻮ‪٢٠١٧ ،‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﻡ‪/‬ﺷﻬﺮ‪/‬ﺳﻨﺔ ‪17/7/10 3‬‬
‫ﺳﻨﺔ‪/‬ﺷﻬﺮ‪/‬ﻳﻮﻡ ‪10/7/17 3‬‬
‫ﺳﻨﺔ‪/‬ﻳﻮﻡ‪/‬ﺷﻬﺮ ‪7/10/17 3‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ ١٢‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭ‪ ٢٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”‪ “24h‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ“‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﻭ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ :‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪192‬‬
‫– ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ :‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪191‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﺗﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻛﻞ ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ ﻟﺪﻳﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻔﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﺬﺍ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﺒﻜﺮ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ ٢٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪25‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺷﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻏﺎﻟﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺮﺍء ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺎً ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺳﻌﺎﺕ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.230‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‬
‫– ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫– ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫– ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪SD‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪SDHC‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪SDXC‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻫﻲ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺑﺮﻳﻞ ‪.٢٠١٦‬‬
‫ً‬
‫• ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ SD‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ SD‬ﺑﺴﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ‪ ٢‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ SDHC‬ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻷﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻭﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪ ٣٢‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ SDXC‬ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻷﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٣٢‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻭﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٢‬ﺗﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻟﻮ ﺗﺤﻘﻘﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ ،‬ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻀﻤﻮﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺑﻄﺎء ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺧﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻃﻮﻳﻼ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﻗ ًﺘﺎ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ”‪ “Y‬ﺃﺻﻔﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪26‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [ON/OFF‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺭﻛﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺘﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻷﻋﻠﻰ )ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻜﻬﺎ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﻤﻊ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﺑﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (26‬ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺃﺷﻴﺎء ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ CASIO‬ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪27‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺮﺭﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ‪ .‬ﺍﺟﺬﺏ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (10‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [ON/OFF‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﺸﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﻔﻆ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ )ﺑﺪء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ( ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﺘﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﻂء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻻﺣﻈﺖ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻌﻮﺑﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ‪ ،SD‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺒﻄﺊ ﺯﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻭﻳﻨﺸﺄ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﺩﺍء ﻭﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [4‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪ “¥ SETTING‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[6‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﻧﻌﻢ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[6‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪28‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪.(120 ،35‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﻴﻖ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻼﻣﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﺠﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻴﺪﻙ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻋﻄﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ١٠‬ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺮﺗﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (188‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (189‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [ON/OFF‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‬
‫ﺃﻭ ]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(22‬‬
‫]‪[ON/OFF‬‬
‫]‪) [ON/OFF‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪ .‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [ON/OFF‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(189‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪29‬‬
‫ﺇﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻣﺴﺎﻙ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺬﺭﺍﻋﻴﻚ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻴﻚ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺤﺬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻭﺣﺎﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‬
‫ﻭﻟﻌﺪﺓ ﻟﺤﻈﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻳًﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺑﻄﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺃﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺃﻓﻘﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺬﺭﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء‬
‫• ﻛﻦ ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﻮﻗﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻘﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻗﺼﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺼﻢ ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻩ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﺼﻤﻚ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺄﺭﺟﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬
‫• ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻻ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻏﺮﺽ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ“ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(187‬‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺬﺭﺍ ﻛﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﻨﻪ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ‬
‫• ﻛﻦ ً‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻇﻼﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪30‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻭﺿﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ( ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫‪ P‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Ÿ‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﺮﻑ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻭﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﺮﻑ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺒﺮﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺤﺘﺎﺝ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﻭﻳﺴﺘﻨﻔﺪ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺮﻉ( ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺒﺮﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [ON/OFF‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻭ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”‪) “P‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﺃﻭ ”‪) “Ÿ‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[MODE‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(230‬‬
‫]‪) [ON/OFF‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‬
‫]‪[MODE‬‬
‫]‪[SET‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪31‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﺺ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺎﻣﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻛﺘﺸﺎﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ‬
‫‪ w‬ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻼﻗﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺴﺘﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ”‪ “Š‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺩﻣﺠﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﻴﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘُﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺻﻮ ًﺗﺎ ﻭﺳﻴﻀﻲء ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺳﻴﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺿﻐﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻠﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻐﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻧﻐﻤﺔ )ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪32‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ً .(10‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺃﻧﺖ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ”ﻻﻗﻂ ﺃﻣﺎﻣﻲ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(100‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺿﻐﻂ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ )ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪(.‬‬
‫]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﻟﺒﺪء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ )ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ :(STD‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪70‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ )ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ :(FHD‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪73‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ )ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ :(HS‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪74‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪...‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺃﺣﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫)ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻗﺮﻳﺐ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ(‪ .‬ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪...‬‬
‫”ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (45‬ﻫﻮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰﻩ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”‪ O‬ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (104‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪33‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ“‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﺮﻑ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(98‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﺮﻑ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(107‬‬
‫– ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(106‬‬
‫– ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ‪) HS‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(34‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﺮﻑ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻭﺿﻮﺿﺎء ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺧﻠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰ‪ .‬ﺭﺟﺎء‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻃﻮﻳﻼ ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﺎﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪ “...‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺷﻌﺮﺕ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻭﻗ ًﺘﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻣﻌﻄﻞ ﻭﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰ‪ .‬ﺭﺟﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪ .“...‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ 2‬ﺃﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ “3‬ﺃﻭ ”ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ“ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(116‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﺮﻑ ﺗﻔﺴﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ”‪ ،“Š‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻭﺩﻣﺠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﺧﻴﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻻﻗﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ“ ﻟﻠﻌﻨﺼﺮ ”ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ‪ “HS‬ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(40‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (49‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻓﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪34‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.120‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ )‪ ،(CS‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.122‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪13‬‬
‫(‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(14‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ‪) z‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(127‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ ﺟﺪًﺍ ﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳُﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[6‬‬
‫]‪[6‬‬
‫]‪[4‬‬
‫]‪[4‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪35‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻌﺪ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﺃﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ )ﺻﻮﺭﺓ( ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ )‪ ،(CS‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.123‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ“ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ“ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ”‪) “¥ SETTING‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(190‬ﻓﻠﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [2‬‬
‫( )ﺣﺬﻑ(‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫”ﻣﻤﻜﻦ“ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ“‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪) [2‬‬
‫(‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺣﺬﻑ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫• ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﻭ‪.٣‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪) CS‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (122‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [2‬‬
‫(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻭ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻤﺴﺢ )ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ( ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪.[SET‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ‪.([) z‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٣‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪36‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﻧﻌﻢ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﻻ“ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٥‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ “ﻧﻌﻢ” ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [SET‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [2‬‬
‫(‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ“‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ً‬
‫ﺣﺎﻻ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺧﺎﻃﺊ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺧﻠﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﺴﻄﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻳﺪﻙ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻂء ﺍﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء‬
‫ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(111‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻠﺤﻈﻲ ﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫• ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺃﺑﻄﺄ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺗﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻅ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻬﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﺑﺨﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎء ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺨﻔﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎء ﻓﻲ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺧﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎء ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻐﺮﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻗ ًﺘﺎ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺸﻮﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪37‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺟﺪﺍﺭ ﺫﻭ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬
‫– ﻫﺪﻑ ﺫﻭ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬
‫– ﻫﺪﻑ ﺳﺎﻃﻊ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫– ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻬﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻜﺮﺭ‬
‫– ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫– ﻫﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻈﻠﻢ‬
‫– ﻫﺪﻑ ﺑﻌﻴﺪ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺗﻌﺰﻳﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫– ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫– ﻫﺪﻑ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫– ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (45‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(44‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪38‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[MODE‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻭ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[MODE‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫‪ Ÿ‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﺮﻑ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻫﺪﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻭﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﺮﻑ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(31‬‬
‫‪ P‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(31‬‬
‫‪BEST SHOT b‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ ﻣﺸﻬﺪﺍً ﻣﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﺭﺍﺋﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(82‬‬
‫‪Art Shot C‬‬
‫ﺷﻴﻮﻋﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﻭﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺇﺛﺎﺭﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(64‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﻓﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺳﻴﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(67‬‬
‫‪ F‬ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻣﺪﻳﻨﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(78‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺃﻭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻞ ﻋﻨﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫‪39‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫]‪[8] [2] [4] [6‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[2‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫]‪[SET‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻪ‪*.‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(41‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(42‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(44‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(46‬‬
‫‪) Make-up 5‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(47‬‬
‫‪ 6‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(48‬‬
‫‪ 7‬ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(49‬‬
‫‪ 8‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(51‬‬
‫* ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(98‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫‪40‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ )ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ(‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ )ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫„ ‪ 10‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ‪ ١٠‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫‚ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻨﺸﺄ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺻﻮﺭ‪ :‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ ١٠‬ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺗﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺟﺎﻫﺰﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﺎﻫﺰﺓ ﻟﻼﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺠﻢ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﺍء ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻻ ﻭﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫” ×‪3‬‬
‫)ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺛﻼﺛﻲ(‬
‫• ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺑﻼ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫‪41‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﻗﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ )ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻭﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﻭﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻭ‪ CS‬ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭ‪ AF CS‬ﻭﺯﻭﻭﻡ ‪ SR‬ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻭﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻟﻴﻠﻴﺔ ‪ HS‬ﻭﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ ﻭﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ )ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻟﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﻈﻞ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﻳﻨﺸﺄ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺥ ﻏﺎﺋﻤﺎً ﻭﺍﻟﻈﻞ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻨﺸﺄ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ )ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‡ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺑﻼ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ¤‬ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﻓﻲ ﻳﻮﻡ ﺻﺎﻑ‬
‫' ﻏﺎﺋﻢ ﺟﺰﺋ ًﻴﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﻓﻲ ﻳﻮﻡ ﻣﻤﻄﺮ ﻭﻏﺎﺋﻢ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﻞ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫“ ﻇﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻳﻮﻡ ﺻﺎﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﻷﺷﺠﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫† ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺑﻴﻀﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺑﻴﻀﺎء ﺑﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ‬
‫– ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ‬
‫ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ‬
‫« ﺗﻨﺠﺴﺘﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫‪42‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﻟﻤﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ”ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ“‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪،‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻴﻀﺎء ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻤﻸ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺭﻕ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﻓﺎﺭﻍ‬
‫· ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”‡ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ“ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻟﻠﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺤﻴﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺋﻢ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻊ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻚ )ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻏﺎﺋﻢ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺦ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫‪43‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ )ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ(‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻫﻮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) Make-up‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫‪ (47‬ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(106‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫‪ Make-up‬ﻭﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ )ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ‬
‫*‪١‬‬
‫ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺧﺎﻃﻔﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺧﺎﻃﻔﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪AF Q‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫´ ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ‬
‫ﺑﻼ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫*‪٣‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺳﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) 9‬ﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ(‬
‫*‪٢‬‬
‫)ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ(‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺳﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٥٠‬ﺳﻢ‬
‫)ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ(‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺳﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) 9‬ﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ(‬
‫*‪٢‬‬
‫)ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ(‬
‫*‪٢‬‬
‫‪MF W‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ(‬
‫ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬
‫*‪ ١‬ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ ٢‬ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ ٣‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺜﺒ ًﺘﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎً ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎً ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪) [4‬ﺃﻗﺮﺏ(‬
‫ﻭ]‪) [6‬ﺃﺑﻌﺪ( ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﻭﺗﻤﻸ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻈﻬﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫‪44‬‬
‫ﺣﺪ ﺃﺻﻔﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻛﺮﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺒﻌﺪﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻛﺮﻭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻛﺮﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺠﺐ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺑﺪﻭﺭﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻜ ّﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻇﻞ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﺘﻰ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﺑﺼﺮﻱ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻛﺮﻭ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻹﻃﻼﻋﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺸﺘﻤﻼ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻛﺮﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪oo* cm - 9 :‬‬
‫* ‪ oo‬ﻫﻲ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ‪ /‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (101‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻛﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‬
‫”ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ“ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ”‪ U‬ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻲ“ ﺃﻭ ”‪ O‬ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ“ ﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(104‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ )ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ(‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”‪ O‬ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ“ ﻛﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﻳﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺪًﺍ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ )‪.(AE‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫‪45‬‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪(ISO) ISO‬‬
‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻫﻲ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ )ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪.(ISO‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪ISO80‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺑﻼ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻈﺮﻭﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺎﺟﺐ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﻲء‬
‫ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﺃﻗﻞ‬
‫‪ISO100‬‬
‫‪ISO200‬‬
‫‪ISO400‬‬
‫‪ISO800‬‬
‫‪ISO1600‬‬
‫‪ISO3200‬‬
‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻻﻗﻂ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ‬
‫)ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻫﺎﺕ‬
‫)ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ(‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ“‪ ،‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻣﻀﺎﺩ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺑﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻘﻂ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(108‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء‬
‫• ً‬
‫ﺗﺼﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﻮﺿﺎء‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻗ ًﺘﺎ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻧﺴﺒﻴًﺎ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫‪46‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﺭﺍﺋﻌﺔ )‪(Make-up‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ‪ Make-up‬ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﺑﺸﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺗﺨﻔﻴﻒ ﻇﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻈﻬﺮ ﺟﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ Make-up‬ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫– ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ‬
‫– ﻓﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫– ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ‪BEST SHOT‬‬
‫– ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ‪Make-up‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ ،(Make-up‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪.[SET‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ“ ﺃﻭ ”ﺑﺸﺮﺓ ﻣﺘﺠﺎﻧﺴﺔ“ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪[4‬‬
‫ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺸﺮﺓ ﻣﺘﺠﺎﻧﺴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ ”ﺳﻤﺮﺍء ‪ “6+‬ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪) 0‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(“ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﻓﺎﺗﺤﺔ‬
‫”‪) 0‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(“‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪“6+‬‬
‫”‪) 12+‬ﺃﻗﺼﻰ(“‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﺘﻰ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ”ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ“ ﺃﻭ ”ﺑﺸﺮﺓ ﻣﺘﺠﺎﻧﺴﺔ“ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ”‪) 0‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(“‪.‬‬
‫– ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫– ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪) AF :‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ Make-up‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ‪ BEST SHOT‬ﻭ‪ Art Shot‬ﻭ‪ CS‬ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫‪47‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪ (EV‬ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ EV 2.0– :‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪EV 2.0+‬‬
‫– ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪1/3EV :‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ )ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫]‪ :[6‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻓﺎﺗﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[4‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻭﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻳﻮﻡ ﺻﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.0.0‬‬
‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻮﺩﺓ ﻗﻴﻤﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪.(“0.0‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺿﻴﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫‪48‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [2‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫> ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺑﻼ‬
‫(‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫]‪) [2‬‬
‫(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ )ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ(‪.‬‬
‫? ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫< ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺩﺍﺋ ًﻤﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﺘﻔﺘﻴﺢ‬
‫ﻫﺪﻑ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺍﺋ ًﻤﺎ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺎً ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ )ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﻣﻊ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ¥‬ﺍﺣﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻓﺮﺻﺔ ﺍﺣﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻴﻦ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬‬
‫< ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.234‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫‪49‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻔﺎﻋﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﺟﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻊ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﺒﻌﺎﺙ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺍﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺧﻠﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺼﻌﺐ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺁﺛﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺖ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻧﺘﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﻭﺟﺎﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺬﺭﺍ ﻛﻲ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻛﻦ ً‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺍً ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺎً ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺯﻣﻦ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (234‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺧﺎﻓﺘﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﺭﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ً‬
‫ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺧﻔﺾ ﺍﺣﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ? )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳُﺤﻈﺮ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻔﺾ ﺍﺣﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ً‬
‫ﻟﻴﻼ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺠﺮﺓ ﺧﺎﻓﺘﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﻊ ﺣﻤﺮﺍء ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺃﻋﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﻌﻜﺎﺱ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺒﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻔﺾ‬
‫ﺍﺣﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﻛﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﺘﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻗﺰﺣﻴﺔ ﻋﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺑﺪﻭﺭﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻔﺾ ﻓﺮﺻﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﺣﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻔﺾ ﺍﺣﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺧﻔﺾ ﺍﺣﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺧﻔﺾ ﺍﺣﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺟﻴﺪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫‪50‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ )ﻗﻴﺎﺱ(‬
‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺃﻱ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺗﻢ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻪ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ )ﻗﻴﺎﺱ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ B‬ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺑﻼ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء‬
‫ﻭﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻗﺴﻢ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‬
‫ﻳﺮﻛﺰ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ‬
‫ﻫﻮ ﺍﻷﻓﻀﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫˜ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻲ‬
‫ﻳﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ‬
‫ﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫‪51‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﺄﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ ﻭﺯﻭﻭﻡ ‪ HD‬ﻭﺯﻭﻭﻡ ‪ SR‬ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩ‬
‫ﻭﺯﻭﻭﻡ ‪ SR‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ /‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻻ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ‬
‫ﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪HD‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻗﺪﺭﺍﺕ ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻗﺺ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻮﻳﻪ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻭﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ‪ SR‬ﻣﻔﺮﺩ‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(55‬‬
‫ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ‪ SR‬ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻣﺠﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﻪ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ‪ SR‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ‪” BEST SHOT‬ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ‪ SR‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(56‬‬
‫ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻻ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ w‬ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ‬
‫‪) w‬ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ( ‪ :‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺗﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪) z‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ( ‪ :‬ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺗﻀﻴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻳُﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻟﻠﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻋﻢ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺁﺓ ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫‪52‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺛﺎء ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫)ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫‪ ٣٥‬ﻣﻢ‪(.‬‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫)ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻛﺮﻭ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫)ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ ﻣﻦ ﻫﻨﺎ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ‬
‫ﺑﻼ‬
‫‪HD‬‬
‫ﺑﻼ‬
‫ﺯﻭﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ‪ SR‬ﻣﻔﺮﺩ‬
‫¨ )ﺃﺑﻴﺾ(‬
‫ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ‪ SR‬ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬
‫¸ )ﺃﺳﻮﺩ(‬
‫ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ‬
‫‪ê‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫‪53‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺗﻔﺴﻴﺮ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻮﻫﺔ‬
‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ‬
‫)ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪(.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫• ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﺯﻭﻭﻡ )‪ “(SR‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ‪ SR‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ‬
‫‪(109‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫”ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ‪ SR‬ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (56‬ﺃﻭ ﻻ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ‪ SR‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ‪” BEST SHOT‬ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ‪ SR‬ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ“‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ‬
‫‪16M‬‬
‫‪10.0X‬‬
‫‪10.0X‬‬
‫‪3:2‬‬
‫‪10.0X‬‬
‫‪10.0X‬‬
‫‪20.0X‬‬
‫‪16:9‬‬
‫‪10.0X‬‬
‫‪10.0X‬‬
‫‪20.0X‬‬
‫ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ‬
‫)ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ(‬
‫ﺯﻭﻭﻡ )‪ :(SR‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫)ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ‪(HD‬‬
‫ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ‪ SR‬ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺯﻭﻭﻡ )‪:(SR‬‬
‫ﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫‪20.0X‬‬
‫‪40.0X‬‬
‫‪40.0X‬‬
‫‪40.0X‬‬
‫‪10M‬‬
‫‪10.0X‬‬
‫‪12.6X‬‬
‫‪25.3X‬‬
‫‪50.5X‬‬
‫‪3M‬‬
‫‪10.0X‬‬
‫‪22.5X‬‬
‫‪45.0X‬‬
‫‪89.8X‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫‪54‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ )ﺯﻭﻭﻡ )‪((SR‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻧﻮﻋﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ‪ :‬ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ‪ SR‬ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩ ﻭﺯﻭﻭﻡ ‪ SR‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ‪ SR‬ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ‪ SR‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻣﺠﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻨﺴﺐ‬
‫ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳ ٍﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻔ ّﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.54‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ‪ SR‬ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ‪SR‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.56‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [4‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪ ،“r REC MENU‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[6‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺯﻭﻭﻡ )‪ “(SR‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[6‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ‪ SR‬ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻧﺴﺠﺔ ﺭﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ‪ SR‬ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ‪ SR‬ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻲ ﻭ‪ Art Shot‬ﻭﻓﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻠﻔﻲ ﻭﺯﻭﻭﻡ ‪ SR‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻭﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻭﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ‪BEST SHOT‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫‪55‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺃﻭﺿﺢ )ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ‪ SR‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ(‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﺭ ﻻﻗﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ )‪ (CS‬ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﺘﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﻴﻦ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(55‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،BEST SHOT‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ‪ SR‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(82‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ‪ SR‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻧﺴﺠﺔ ﺭﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ‪ SR‬ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ‪ SR‬ﻣﻔﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺛﻼﺛﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪّﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬
‫• ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ‪ SR‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ? )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻀﺎﺩ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ“‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(108‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ‪ SR‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”‪ “ISO 3200‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪“ISO‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(46‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )‪(CS‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻻﻗﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻃﺎﻟﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻻﻗﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫)ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ ﻟـ ‪ CS‬ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ(‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ‪ ٥ ،‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ‪ ١٠ ،‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ‪،‬‬
‫‪ ١٥‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ‪ ٣٠ ،‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ = ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ‪٣٠ ،٢٠ ،١٠ ،٥ CS‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫‪56‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [4‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪ ،“r REC MENU‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(39‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[6‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”‪ CS‬ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”‪ “CS‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[6‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.Ú‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫‪ .٧‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ )ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ ﻟـ ‪ CS‬ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٨‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ )‪ (CS‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ”ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ ﻟـ ‪ CS‬ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ“ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٩‬‬
‫‪ .١٠‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫‪ .١١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ‪.(CS‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻃﺎﻟﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ”ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ ﻟـ ‪ CS‬ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ“‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫‪57‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻟﻠﻤﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ CS‬ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﺪﻙ ﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ )ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [4‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪ ،“r REC MENU‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(39‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[6‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”‪ CS‬ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”‪ “CS‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[6‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.Ú‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫‪ .٧‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ )ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ ﻟـ ‪ CS‬ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٨‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ )‪ (CS‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ”ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ ﻟـ ‪ CS‬ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ“ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٩‬‬
‫‪ .١٠‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫‪58‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ‪.(CS‬‬
‫‪ .١١‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫)ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ‪ CS‬ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ( ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘًﺎ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫• ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ 0 :‬ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪ 3 ،‬ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪ 5 ،‬ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪ 10 ،‬ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪ 15 ،‬ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪ 20 ،‬ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪ 25 ،‬ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”‪ 0‬ﻟﻘﻄﺔ“‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻃﺎﻟﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻦ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻣﺘﺒﻮﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻃﺎﻟﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ”ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ ﻟـ ‪ CS‬ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ“‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺯﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻗﻪ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺃﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﻋﺎﺩﻱ“‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ? )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ .٩:١٦ ،٢:٣ :‬ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻻﻗﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺠﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪ “16M‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻲ ﻭﺯﻭﻭﻡ ‪ SR‬ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬
‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻻﻗﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ”‪ “CS‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﻻﻗﻂ ﺃﻣﺎﻣﻲ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(100‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫‪59‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )‪(AF CS‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ‪ AF CS‬ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻻﻗﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺳﻬﻼ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٣‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٦‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [4‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪ ،“r REC MENU‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(39‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[6‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”‪ “AF CS‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ “‪ ”CS‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[6‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.Ú‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺃﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪٢:٣ :‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ .٩:١٦‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ AF CS‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺣﺠﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.16M‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻻﻗﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﻻﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻭﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﻭﺯﻭﻭﻡ ‪.SR‬‬
‫• ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.AF CS‬‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫‪AF‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫‪AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻲ‬
‫‪60‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ )ﻻﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ(‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻻﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻣﺘﻰ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﻔﺖ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻮﻳﺢ ﺑﻴﺪﻳﻚ‪ ،‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻈﻬﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ ﺃﻭ ‪) Make-up‬ﻣﺸﻬﺪ‬
‫‪.(BEST SHOT‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [4‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪ ،“r REC MENU‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[6‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ“ ﺃﻭ ”‪ 180‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﻻﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[6‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”‪ 180‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ“‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .٧‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺩﺍﺋ ًﻤﺎ“ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻻﻗﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٨‬‬
‫‪.٧‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”‪ 180‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ“ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٦‬ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ ١٨٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(17‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻻﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٨‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ )ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( )ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ” “ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٩‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻳﺪﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫‪61‬‬
‫)ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺃﻳﺎً ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻻﻗﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪ ٣٠‬ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻻﻗﻂ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫– ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫– ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫– ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻻﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻻﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻃﻔﻴﻒ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﻌﻴﺪًﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ )ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺍﺭ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”‪ O‬ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ“ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻻﻗﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”‪ O‬ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ“ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻻﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪ U‬ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻲ“‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ )ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫‪62‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻻﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ )ﻻﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻻﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [4‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪ ،“r REC MENU‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[6‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻻﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﻻﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[6‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻻﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﺋ ًﻤﺎ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻞ ﻻﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ً‬
‫ﻧﺸﻄﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻻ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 180‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻻﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ ١٨٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ :‬ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻻﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺠﺐ ﻣﺮﻭﺭﻩ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ 0.5 :‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ‪ 10 ،‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ” “ ﻭﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‬
‫]‪ :[6] [4] [2] [8‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[MODE‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻜﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪63‬‬
‫”‬
‫“‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ )‪(Art Shot‬‬
‫ﺷﻴﻮﻋﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺇﺛﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﻬﺪ‬
‫ﺭﺳﻢ‬
‫‪HDR‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪) HDR‬ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻊ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (88‬ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻟﻮ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻔﻴﻒ‬
‫ﻇﻞ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺧﻔﻴﻒ ﻭﺷﺎﻋﺮﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﻥ ﻓﺎﺗﺢ‬
‫ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺧﺎﻓﺖ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﺑﺼﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺭﺯ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻨﻲ ﺩﺍﻛﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻛﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻠﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻗﺪﻳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﻐﺮ‬
‫ﻇﻞ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﻭﻛﺄﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺎﻟﻢ ﻣﺼﻐﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻜﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻜﺔ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺤﻜﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺮﺍﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺨﻔﻴﻒ ﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﻳﺴﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺧﻠﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻏﺎﻣﺾ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻘﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬
‫‪Art Shot‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺭﺳﻢ ‪ HDR‬ﻭﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ ﻭﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﻳﺴﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻭ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”‪ ،(Art Shot) “C‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[MODE‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ‪.Art Shot‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ‪ Art Shot‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.١‬‬
‫– ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [SET‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[SET‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫‪64‬‬
‫)‪ ،(Art Shot‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [SET‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻣﺲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﻬﺪ‬
‫ﺭﺳﻢ‬
‫‪HDR‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻔﻴﻒ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻟﻮﻥ ﻓﺎﺗﺢ‬
‫ﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺭﺯ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺑﻨﻲ ﺩﺍﻛﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﻐﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻜﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺮﺍﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﻳﺴﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ‪ ،Art Shot‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ )ﺭﺳﻢ ‪ ،HDR‬ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﻳﺴﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ(‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ‪ Art Shot‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺛﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٤‬ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‬
‫ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪.[6‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫‪65‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ”‪ ،“Art Shot‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ”‪ “Art Shot‬ﻫﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ? )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺮﺍﻗﺔ“ ﺃﻭ ”ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ‪.“Art Shot‬‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ”ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ‪ ،“Art Shot‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ ،HDR Art‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ“ ﺇﻣﺎ ”‪ “HD‬ﺃﻭ ”‪ “STD‬ﻓﻘﻂ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(111‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻱ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ“ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ”‪ “STD‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”‪ “HD‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪.HDR Art‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ”ﺭﺳﻢ ‪ “HDR‬ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻲ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ‪ Art Shot‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬
‫‪.Art Shot‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪) HDR Art‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪(HDR‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ :HDR Art‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫‪ HDR Art‬ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ )ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﺑﺪﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻭ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”‪ ،(Art Shot) “C‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [4‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪ ،“r REC MENU‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[MODE‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[6‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”)ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪ “(HDR‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[6‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ“ ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ HDR Art‬ﻣﻔﺮﺩﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ )ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪.٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻋﺪﺍ ﺭﺳﻢ ‪ ،HDR‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ‪ Art Shot‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ Art Shot‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ‬
‫ﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ )ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ‪.(Art Shot‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫‪66‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻠﻔﻲ )ﻓﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻠﻔﻲ(‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ‪) make-up‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(47‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ ﻭﺗﻠﻄﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﺖ ﻣﺬﻫﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ :‬ﺃﻧﻴﻖ‪ ،‬ﺿﺒﺎﺑﻲ‪ ،‬ﺧﻴﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪﻳﻢ‪،‬‬
‫ﺣﻴﻮﻱ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻭ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”‪) “N‬ﻓﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻠﻔﻲ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[MODE‬‬
‫]‪.[SET‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[SET‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ”‪) “N‬ﻓﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻠﻔﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻓﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻠﻔﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻠﻔﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ISO‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫‪AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺯﻭﻭﻡ‬
‫‪SR‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪AF‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪67‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺳﻴﻠﻔﻲ )ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻠﻔﻲ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻠﻔﻲ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺗﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ ﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻠﻔﻲ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٥‬ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻠﻔﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﺖ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻠﻔﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻠﻔﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [4‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪ “r REC MENU‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[6‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﻻﻗﻂ ﺃﻣﺎﻣﻲ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[6‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺻﻮﺭ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻔﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺪﺗﻬﺎ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫×‪3‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻠﻔﻲ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺳﻴﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ ١٨٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(17‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ ﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻠﻔﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ ﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻠﻔﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪٥‬‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ‪ .‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ ﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫‪68‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ‪.BEST SHOT‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻠﻔﻲ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻠﻔﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻻﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻻﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫‪69‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫)‪.(STD‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻳﺸﺮﺡ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(71‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ )ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ :(FHD‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪73‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ )ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ :(HS‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪74‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻭ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”‪) “P‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[MODE‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﺃﻭ ”‪) “Ÿ‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪.[SET‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [4‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫”‪ ،“r REC MENU‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[6‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪.[6‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”‪) “STD‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫]‪[SET‬‬
‫]‪[MENU‬‬
‫]‪[8] [2] [4] [6‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ‪ ٣:٤‬ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ ٤٨٠x٦٤٠‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻗﺪﺭﻩ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ‬
‫)ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ .(STD‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ”ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(117‬‬
‫‪.٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ‪ Y‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻷﺣﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [SET‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(107‬‬
‫‪.٨‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ ٢٩‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ‪ ٢٩‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺪء‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(231‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪) MOV‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(183‬ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪70‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(31‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﺘﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺒﺮﻣﺞ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺎﻣﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻛﺘﺸﺎﻓﻬﺎ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ ﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ FHD‬ﻭ‪ STD‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺒﺮﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪BEST SHOT‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪) BEST SHOT‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(82‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﻳﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ ﻭﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﻫﺎ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺭﺍﺋﻌﺔ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻀﺎﺩ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (108‬ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ FHD‬ﻭ‪ .STD‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻀﺎﺩ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻣﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪HDR Art‬‬
‫ﻭﺃﻥ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻀﺎﺩ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻊ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺑﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﻣﺪﻣﺞ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ( ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺡ )ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺡ( ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(115‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫• ﺗﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻛﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺬﺭ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺣﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺑﺄﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺦ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﺯﻭﻭﻡ‬
‫ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ”‪ “HS‬ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ”‪ 30-120‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ“ ﺃﻭ‬
‫”‪ 30-240‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ“‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻗﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪71‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻗﻀﺎء ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺩﺍﻓﺌﺔ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻟﻤﺴﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻭﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻄﻞ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺒﻌﺎﺙ ﺍﻟﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﻧﺴﺒﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ )ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﻀﻴﺌﺔ( ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺩﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺒﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﻥ ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺑﻄﺎء ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺧﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻃﻮﻳﻼ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﻗ ًﺘﺎ‬
‫ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ”‪ “Y‬ﺃﺻﻔﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻋﻢ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(52‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ‪ SR‬ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (55‬ﻭﺯﻭﻭﻡ ‪ SR‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (56‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ ﺟﺪًﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫• ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ‪ ،‬ﻳُﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (107‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”‪) “AF‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﺃﻭ ”ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ“ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ“‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ FHD‬ﻭ‪ STD‬ﻭﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ )‪ FHD‬ﻭ‪.(STD‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻠﻔﻲ ﻭﺯﻭﻭﻡ ‪ SR‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻭﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ‪.BEST SHOT‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪72‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ‬
‫ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ )‪ (FHD‬ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ‪ .‬ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ FHD‬ﻫﻲ ‪ ٩:١٦‬ﻭﺣﺠﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻫﻮ ‪ ١٠٨٠x١٩٢٠‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻫﻮ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻭ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”‪) “P‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﺃﻭ ”‪) “Ÿ‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[MODE‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [4‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪ ،“r REC MENU‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[6‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”‪ “FHD‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫‪ .٧‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺒﻌﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[6‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(70‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﻟﺒﺪء ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪73‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻗﺼﻮﻯ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎ ‪ ١٠٠٠‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ )ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ”‪ 30-120‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ“ ﺃﻭ ”‪ 30-240‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ“‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻭ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”‪) “P‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [4‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪ ،“r REC MENU‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[MODE‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[6‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ )ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ( ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[6‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ )ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ ١٠٠٠‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ( ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﺻﻐﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪HS1000‬‬
‫‪ 1000‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ‬
‫‪٦٤x٢٢٤‬‬
‫‪HS480‬‬
‫‪ 480‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ‬
‫‪١٦٠x٢٢٤‬‬
‫‪HS240‬‬
‫‪ 240‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ‬
‫‪٣٨٤x٥١٢‬‬
‫‪HS120‬‬
‫‪ 120‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ‬
‫‪٤٨٠x٦٤٠‬‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪HS30-240‬‬
‫‪HS30-120‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪30-240‬‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ‬
‫‪30-120‬‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ‬
‫‪74‬‬
‫‪٣٨٤x٥١٢‬‬
‫‪٤٨٠x٦٤٠‬‬
‫• ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ )ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ( ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٧‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺒﻌﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(70‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﻟﺒﺪء ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ )‪ ،(HS1000 ،HS480 ،HS240 ،HS120‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺜﺒ ًﺘﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎً ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎً ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪[0‬‬
‫)ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ”‪ “HS30-120‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫”‪ .“HS30-240‬ﻟﻜﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺛﺎﺑ ًﺘﺎ ﻣﺘﻰ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٢٠‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ٢٤٠‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”‪ “HS30-120‬ﺃﻭ ”‪ “HS30-240‬ﻛﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺋ ًﻤﺎ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ ٣٠‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ‪ ٣٠‬ﻭ‪ ١٢٠‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٣٠‬ﻭ‪ ٢٤٠‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [SET‬ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﻊ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ )ﺳﺮﻋﺔ( ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺟﺪ‬
‫ﺃﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺳﻮﺩﺍء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻭﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻭﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺃﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻄﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪75‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ )ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ((‬
‫ﻳﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ )ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﺨﻤﺲ ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ )ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻟﻠﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺒﻮﻋﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ(‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺧﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬
‫]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ‬
‫ﺟﺰء ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ‪ ٥‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ )ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ(‬
‫• ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ .‬ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [4‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪ ،“r REC MENU‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”‪ (BEST SHOT) “b‬ﻛﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(82‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[6‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[6‬‬
‫]‪.[SET‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫‪ .٧‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ )‪ ،(BEST SHOT‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫‪ .٨‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻭ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ”ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ )ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ‪) ‰‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ )ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪76‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﺎﻫﺰًﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ‪ ٥‬ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( )ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ( ﻭﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫”‪“P‬‬
‫• ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [MODE‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫)ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﺃﻭ ”‪) “Ÿ‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ”‪ “HS30-120‬ﻭ”‪ ،“HS30-240‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ )ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ( ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ )ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ( ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﻟﺒﺪء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺇﻻ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ )‪ (FHD‬ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ )‪،(STD‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪77‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ )ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻸﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﺑﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻟﺘﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻤﺎﺛﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺷﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻭ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”‪) “F‬ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[MODE‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.١‬‬
‫– ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [SET‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[SET‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [SET‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ“ ﺃﻭ ”‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”‬
‫]‪ ،[6‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ“‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ” ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ“ ﺃﻭ ” ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺜﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺯﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫”ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ“‬
‫ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ“‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪78‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﻬﺪ‬
‫‪.٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٥‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﻘﻀﺎء ﺯﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٥‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺯﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ” ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ“ ﻋﻠﻰ ”ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ“‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺳﺘﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(188‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ“ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ“ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻨﻔﺎﺩ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(188‬ﺳﺘﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﺇﺫ ﻟﻢ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻟﻜﻦ‪،‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [ON/OFF‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‬
‫– ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(189‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ‪ ،SR‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻀﺎﺩ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‪ AF ،‬ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻻﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻴﺎﺱ‪ ،ISO ،‬ﺣﺪ ‪ ISO‬ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ‪Make-up ،‬‬
‫• ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ ٢٠‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪FHD :٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ‪ ٧‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪HD :١١‬‬
‫• ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(135‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ”» ﺭﺳﻢ ‪ “HDR‬ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻲ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ )ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (193‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻮﺩﺓ ”ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ“ ﻭ”ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ“ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ”ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ“ ﻭ”ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ“ ﻓﺮﻳﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ”» ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻟﻴﻠﻲ“ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ”‪) “S‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (40‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪.‬‬
‫”ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ“‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪79‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‬
‫ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪.[6‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪80‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻠﻮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٧‬ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٠‬ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ )ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ(‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ‪ ٢٨‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ FHD‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ STD‬ﻛﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(111‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [4‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [6‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ .[SET‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ( ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ‪ t‬ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻃﺎﻟﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺇﻻ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ FHD‬ﻭﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ STD‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺪﻋﻮ ًﻣﺎ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻫﻮ‬
‫ﻧﻔﺲ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ FHD‬ﺃﻭﺳﻊ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪.FHD‬‬
‫• ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﻋﺎﺩﻱ“‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ”ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ“ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪Art Shot ،‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪81‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪BEST SHOT‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ‪ BEST SHOT‬ﻟﻚ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ”ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ“ ﻛﻌﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺗﺎﻟﻔﺔ‬
‫ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪BEST SHOT‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻭ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”‪ ،(BEST SHOT) “b‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[MODE‬‬
‫]‪[MODE‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪.BEST SHOT‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻭ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‬
‫)ﻣﺤﺎﻁ ﺑﺤﺪ(‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [8‬ﺃﻭ ]‪.[2‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [MODE‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”‪) “P‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﺃﻭ ”‪) “Ÿ‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ(‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [SET‬ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.١‬‬
‫– ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [SET‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[SET‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‬
‫)‪ ،(BEST SHOT‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ )ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( )ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ‪ ،BEST SHOT‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻝ‪ ...‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪ “...‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪ .‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﻴﺪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪BEST SHOT‬‬
‫‪82‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‬
‫ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪.[6‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪.[SET‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ‪BEST SHOT‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ‪ BEST SHOT‬ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﻣﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ‪ BEST SHOT‬ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻗﻌﺔ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ‪ .BEST SHOT‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪،‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ BEST SHOT‬ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ‬
‫‪ BEST SHOT‬ﺁﺧﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ‪ BEST SHOT‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ )ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ‪ BEST SHOT‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ‪ ،Make-up‬ﻣﺮﺁﺓ ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ‪ HS ،‬ﺑﻤﻀﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪ ،‬ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻟﻴﻠﻴﺔ ‪ ،HS‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ‪ ،HDMI‬ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ‪،HDR ،‬‬
‫ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ‪ SR‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ ،FHD/STD‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ‬
‫‪ BEST SHOT‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺠﺎﻫﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ‪ BEST SHOT‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ‪ BEST SHOT‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻻﻗﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺘﺠﺎﻫﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﺯﻭﻭﻡ )‪.“(SR‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ‪ BEST SHOT‬ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻀﻴﻴﻖ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻟﻴﻠﻲ ﻭﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﺖ ‪ HS‬ﻭﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻟﻴﻠﻴﺔ ‪HS‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪BEST SHOT‬‬
‫‪83‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﺭﺍﺋﻌﺔ )‪(Make-up‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ‪ Make-up‬ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﺑﺸﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺗﺨﻔﻴﻒ ﻇﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻈﻬﺮ ﺟﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [SET‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،BEST SHOT‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”‪) “Make-up‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(82‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ (Make-up‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ“ ﺃﻭ ”ﺑﺸﺮﺓ ﻣﺘﺠﺎﻧﺴﺔ“ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪[4‬‬
‫ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺸﺮﺓ ﻣﺘﺠﺎﻧﺴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ ”ﺳﻤﺮﺍء ‪ “6+‬ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪) 0‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(“ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﻓﺎﺗﺤﺔ‬
‫”‪) 0‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(“‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪“6+‬‬
‫”‪) 12+‬ﺃﻗﺼﻰ(“‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺑﺸﺮﺓ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‬
‫)ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ‪(Make-up‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ‪) Make-up‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ‪ (Make-up‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪ ،‬ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺑﺸﺮﺓ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺗﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [SET‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،BEST SHOT‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ‪) “Make-up‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(82‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ (Make-up‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ“ ﺃﻭ ”ﺑﺸﺮﺓ ﻣﺘﺠﺎﻧﺴﺔ“ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪[4‬‬
‫ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺸﺮﺓ ﻣﺘﺠﺎﻧﺴﺔ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ ”ﺳﻤﺮﺍء ‪ “6+‬ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪) 0‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(“ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﻓﺎﺗﺤﺔ‬
‫”‪) 0‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(“‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪“6+‬‬
‫”‪) 12+‬ﺃﻗﺼﻰ(“‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ”ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ“ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ً ،‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٤‬ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪BEST SHOT‬‬
‫‪84‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ‪ ،Make-up‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻧﺴﺨﺘﻴﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ Make-up BKT‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺳﻤﺮﺍء ‪ “6+‬ﺃﻭ ”ﻓﺎﺗﺤﺔ ‪ “6+‬ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ“‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪.Make-up BKT‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻠﺤﻈﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،BEST SHOT‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(82‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺻﻮﺭ‪ :‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺟﺰﺋ ًﻴًﺎ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺯﻭﻭﻡ‬
‫‪SR‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫‪AF‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”‪ O‬ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ“ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”‪ O‬ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ“ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫”‪ U‬ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻲ“‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪BEST SHOT‬‬
‫‪85‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﻤﻀﺎﺩ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ )ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﻤﻀﺎﺩ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ(‬
‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻀﺎﺩ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ‪ ،‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻤﻀﺎﺩ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﺩﻣﺠﻬﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻀﺎﺩ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ ﻷﺣﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺪًﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،BEST SHOT‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”‪ HS‬ﺑﻤﻀﺎﺩ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(82‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ‪ BEST SHOT‬ﻫﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ? )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﻮﻫﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ً‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﻤﻀﺎﺩ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻼﺋﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ‪ BEST SHOT‬ﻫﺬﻩ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ”ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪) “ISO‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(46‬‬
‫ﻭ”ﺣﺪ ‪ ISO‬ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (103‬ﻋﻠﻰ ”ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ“‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪BEST SHOT‬‬
‫‪86‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﺎﺗﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻡ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻟﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺛﻢ ﺩﻣﺠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻡ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ”ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻟﻴﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ”ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ“‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫‪“HS‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،BEST SHOT‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻟﻴﻠﻴﺔ ‪) “HS‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(82‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﺭﺍ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻛﻦ ً‬
‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ )ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪) “ISO‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪” (46‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ“ )ﺛﺎﺑﺖ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻀﺎﺩ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺿﻴﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ 16M‬ﻭ‪٢:٣‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ .٩:١٦‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 10M‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪BEST SHOT‬‬
‫‪87‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻴﻞ )‪(HDR‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) HDR‬ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻭﺩﻣﺠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [SET‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ )‪ HDR‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪ HDR‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،BEST SHOT‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”‪) “HDR‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(82‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪ HDR‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪ ١‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪ ٢‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪.٣‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ HDR‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻟﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ? )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﻀﺎﺩ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻋﻦ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻀﻴﻴﻖ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ HDR‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺤﺮﻛﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪BEST SHOT‬‬
‫‪88‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ )ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ(‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻠﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﺸﺪﺓ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺫﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻋﺎﻛﺴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺛﻼﺙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ”ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ“‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ”ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ“‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [SET‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،BEST SHOT‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(82‬‬
‫)ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ(‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪ ١‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪ ٢‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪.٣‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﻗﺘﺮﺍﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻗﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﻣﻜﺎﻥ‪ً .‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﻗﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪ :‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ )‪ ،(W‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬
‫‪ ٣٠‬ﺳﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ‪ ١‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ? )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻀﺎﺩ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ“‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(108‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﻔﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻷﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”ﻓﺸﻞ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‪ .‬ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ .“.‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ً‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪BEST SHOT‬‬
‫‪89‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ )ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ(‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﺩﻣﺠﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﻞ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮﻫﺎ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ :‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ”ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ“‬
‫ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ ،BEST SHOT‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(82‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﺭﺍ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﺼﺒﺢ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻗﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﻣﻜﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (52‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ? )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻀﺎﺩ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ“‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(108‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”ﻓﺸﻞ ﺩﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ“ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ ﻷﺣﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺩﻣﺠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪BEST SHOT‬‬
‫‪90‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ )ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ(‬
‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺩﻣﺠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣٦٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺃﺿﺨﻢ ﺑﻜﺜﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻣﻜﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﻴﻦ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ‪ ١٠٨٠x١١٥٢٠‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ‪ ٧٢٩٦x١٩٢٠‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٣٦٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻭﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺭﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪١٨٠‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٣٦٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺼﺒﺢ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ ٦٠‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ١٢٠‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ١٨٠‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ٢٤٠‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ٣٠٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [SET‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ )ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺨﻄﻂ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺠﺎﻫﻪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،BEST SHOT‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(82‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﺘﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪BEST SHOT‬‬
‫‪91‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺒﻂء ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺼﻞ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺣﺮﻛﺘﻪ )ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﺘﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻮﻗﻔﺖ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺳﻄﻮﻋﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﻤﺎ‬
‫– ﺍﻷﻧﻬﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﺝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﻼﻻﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺫﻱ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫– ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻃﺊ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺫﻱ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ‬
‫– ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‬
‫– ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ‬
‫– ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﻣﻈﻠﻤﺔ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫– ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺑﻄﺄ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻓﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻇﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭ‪/‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻳﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻣ ًﻌﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ‬
‫•‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻻﺿﻄﺮﺍﺏ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺎﻡ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻦ ﻣ ًﻌﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﻪ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻭﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ? )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪BEST SHOT‬‬
‫‪92‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﺎﺋﻖ )ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ(‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺛﻢ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻌﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺋﻖ ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺃﻋﺮﺽ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪ ٣٥‬ﻣﻢ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ‪ ١٥‬ﻭ‪ ١٩‬ﻣﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢٥‬ﻣﻢ )ﺃﻋﺮﺽ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ(‬
‫‪ ١٥‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫‪ ١٩‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [SET‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ )ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ( ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،BEST SHOT‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(82‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﻥ‪ ١٩” :‬ﻣﻢ“ ﻭ”‪ ١٥‬ﻣﻢ“‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”‪ ١٥‬ﻣﻢ“ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺃﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ”‪ ١٩‬ﻣﻢ“‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﺘﺠﻪ‬
‫ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻳﺘﺠﻪ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻭﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺣﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ‬
‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺤﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪BEST SHOT‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‬
‫‪93‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻱ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪء‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺒﻂء ﻭﻓﻘًﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻺﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻓﻘﻴًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺃﺳﻴًﺎ ﺑﺒﻂء ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻗﻮﺱ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺴﺪﻙ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻓﻘﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺟﺴﺪﻙ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺟﺴﺪﻙ ﻛﻤﺤﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺭﺃﺳﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺟﺴﺪﻙ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻛﺘﻔﻴﻚ ﻛﻤﺤﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻬﻢ‬
‫ﺣﺬﺭﺍ ﻛﻲ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺎﺋﻞ ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫– ﻛﻦ ً‬
‫ﺇﻣﺴﺎﻛﻬﺎ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﺘﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻮﻗﻔﺖ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪BEST SHOT‬‬
‫‪94‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ”‪ ١٥‬ﻣﻢ“ ﻭ ”‪ ١٩‬ﻣﻢ“ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻷﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻗﻴﻢ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻀﻤﻮﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ‪ ١٥‬ﻣﻢ ﺃﻭ ‪ ١٩‬ﻣﻢ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺳﻄﻮﻋﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﻤﺎ‬
‫– ﺍﻷﻧﻬﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﺝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﻼﻻﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺫﻱ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫– ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻃﺊ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺫﻱ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ‬
‫– ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‬
‫– ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ‬
‫– ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺎﻃﺤﺔ ﺳﺤﺎﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺒﻨﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫– ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﻣﻈﻠﻤﺔ‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء‪.‬‬
‫– ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫– ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺑﻄﺄ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ‬
‫– ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‬
‫– ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺧﺎﻃﺊ‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻓﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻇﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺑﺆﺭﻳﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء‬
‫• ً‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺗﻴﻦ ﻣ ًﻌﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﺍﻣﺾ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻭﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ‪ BEST SHOT‬ﻫﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ? )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪BEST SHOT‬‬
‫‪95‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ )ﺧﺮﺝ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ‪(HDMI‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ‪ ،٩:١٦‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺼﻠﻪ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻭﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻟﻺﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻋﻨﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺻﻞ‬
‫ﺩﺧﻞ‬
‫‪HDMI‬‬
‫‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫)ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺎً(‬
‫ﺧﺮﺝ ‪) HDMI‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ(‬
‫ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،BEST SHOT‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ‪) “HDMI‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(82‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪BEST SHOT‬‬
‫‪96‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻋﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.128‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(129‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫‪AF‬‬
‫‪٩:١٦‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻲ‬
‫‪ AF‬ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪Make-up‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﺱ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪BEST SHOT‬‬
‫‪97‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ )‪(REC MENU‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (40‬ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ .‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫]‪[8] [2] [4] [6‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )‪.(r REC MENU‬‬
‫• ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫)‪ (r REC MENU‬ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )‪.(p PLAY MENU‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[4‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [6‬ﺃﻭ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [6‬ﺃﻭ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[SET‬‬
‫]‪[MENU‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ“ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪“r REC MENU‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [SET‬ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [4‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [MENU‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [MENU‬ﻟﻨﻘﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ .[4‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[6‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫)‪(REC MENU‬‬
‫‪98‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺷﺮﺡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺷﺮﺣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
‫”ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ“ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.98‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [4‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪ ،“r REC MENU‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[6‬‬
‫]‪[MENU‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ” ‪“r REC MENU‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[6‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )‪(CS‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪3 “r REC MENU‬‬
‫‪CS‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 56‬ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ )ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪3 “r REC MENU‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 152‬ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫)‪(REC MENU‬‬
‫‪99‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ )ﻻﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪3 “r REC MENU‬‬
‫ﻻﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 61‬ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ )ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪3 “r REC MENU‬‬
‫ﻻﻗﻂ ﺃﻣﺎﻣﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ )ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ(‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺯﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻃﺆ ﺃﻗﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫)ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪AF‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫×‪3‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺳﻴﻠﻔﻲ )ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻠﻔﻲ( ﺃﻭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻼﺙ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﺳﻴﻠﻔﻲ )ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻠﻔﻲ ‪ (٣ x‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(68‬‬
‫‪CS‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٠‬ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪ ١٠‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ”‪) “CS‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (56‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫”ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ“‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫)‪(REC MENU‬‬
‫‪100‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.130‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﻻﻗﻂ ﺃﻣﺎﻣﻲ“ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺧﻼﻑ ”ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ“‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻻﻗﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ )‪ (CS‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪) [6‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ‪ /‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪3 “r REC MENU‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ‪ /‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺃﻳﺎً ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪.[6‬‬
‫]‪[4]/[6‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫‪CS‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(56‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(48‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(42‬‬
‫‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(51‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺯﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(41‬‬
‫ﻻﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻻﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(61‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫‪ISO‬‬
‫)‪(REC MENU‬‬
‫‪101‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪[6‬‬
‫‪(46‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ )ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪3 “r REC MENU‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.41‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪3 “r REC MENU‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.48‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ )ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪3 “r REC MENU‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.42‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪(ISO) ISO‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪ISO 3 “r REC MENU‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.46‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫)‪(REC MENU‬‬
‫‪102‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺣﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ )ﺣﺪ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻊ(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪3 “r REC MENU‬‬
‫ﺣﺪ ‪ ISO‬ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺑﻼ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫”ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪) “ISO‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(46‬‬
‫‪ISO 200‬‬
‫‪ISO 400‬‬
‫ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻫﻮ ﺣﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ“ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪) “ISO‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(46‬‬
‫‪ISO 800‬‬
‫‪ISO 1600‬‬
‫‪ISO 3200‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪) “ISO‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (46‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺧﻼﻑ ”ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ“‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺠﺎﻫﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫”ﺣﺪ ‪ ISO‬ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ“ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪.“ISO‬‬
‫• ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ”ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻟﻴﻠﻴﺔ ‪) “HS‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(87‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ISO 25600 ،ISO 12800 ،ISO 6400 ،ISO 3200 ،ISO 1600 ،‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﺣﺪ ‪ ISO‬ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ“ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ‪BEST SHOT‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”‪ “ISO 3200‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ‪ SR‬ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫”‪ “ISO 3200‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ‪ SR‬ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫”‪.“ISO 1600‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫)‪(REC MENU‬‬
‫‪103‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ )ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪3 “r REC MENU‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.44‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪(AF‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪3 “r REC MENU‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪AF‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ”‪ U‬ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻲ“ ﺩﺍﺋ ًﻤﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫‪ š‬ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (106‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ U‬ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺑﺄﺧﺬ ﻗﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺟﻴﺪ ﻣﻊ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(45‬‬
‫‪ I‬ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻷﻓﻀﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﺴﻌﺔ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻣﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺣﺪﺩﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [4‬ﺃﻭ ]‪.[6‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻭ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫‪ O‬ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﺒﻊ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫)‪(REC MENU‬‬
‫‪104‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫”‪ š‬ﺫﻛﻲ“‬
‫”‪ U‬ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻲ“ ﺃﻭ‬
‫”‪ O‬ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ“‬
‫”‪ I‬ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ“‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”‪) “MF‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ( ﻛﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(44‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻫﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”‪ O‬ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ“ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻭﺿﻮﺿﺎء ً‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺧﻠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ‪ ،BEST SHOT‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺃﻱ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”‪ I‬ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ“ ﻛﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﻻ ﺗﺘﺄﺛﺮ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ“ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(101‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫)‪(REC MENU‬‬
‫‪105‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ )ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪3 “r REC MENU‬‬
‫ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻓﺮﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﺸﺮﺓ ﺃﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ )ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻞ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺳﺘﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ّ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﻭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(104‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺩﺍﺋ ًﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )‪ (AF‬ﻛﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺠﻮﺏ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻈﺎﺭﺓ ﺷﻤﺴﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺒﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻛﻦ‬
‫– ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺑﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫– ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫– ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻡ‬
‫– ﻭﺟﻪ ﺣﻴﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻟﻴﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺑﺸﺮﻳﺔ‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ‪BEST SHOT‬‬
‫– ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ‪Art Shot‬‬
‫– ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ‪ BEST SHOT‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ(‬
‫– ﻻﻗﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ )ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ‪BEST SHOT‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻻﻗﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ(‬
‫• ﺩﺍﺋ ًﻤﺎ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ“ ﻋﻠﻰ ”‪) “AF‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻣﺘﻰ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫”ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ“‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ“‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ“ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫”ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ“‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫)‪(REC MENU‬‬
‫‪106‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﺭﺍﺋﻌﺔ )‪(Make-up‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪3 “r REC MENU‬‬
‫‪Make-up‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.47‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ )‪ AF‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪3 “r REC MENU‬‬
‫‪ AF‬ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ AF‬ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫”ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ“ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻭﺿﻮﺿﺎء ً‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺧﻠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ )ﻗﻴﺎﺱ(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪3 “r REC MENU‬‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﺱ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.51‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫)‪(REC MENU‬‬
‫‪107‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ )ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻀﺎﺩ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪3 “r REC MENU‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻀﺎﺩ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻀﺎﺩ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺧﺎﻓﺘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﻗﻮﻱ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻷﺳﺮﻉ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ“ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ً .‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ“‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﻋﺪﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ CS‬ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ( ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ ﺃﻭ ‪ HS‬ﺑﻤﻀﺎﺩ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻼ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻀﺎﺩ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ FHD‬ﻭ‪.STD‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻀﺎﺩ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ HDR Art‬ﺃﻭ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻀﺎﺩ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺭﺩﻳﺌﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩﺓ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺑﺴﻴﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻼﺋﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻀﺎﺩ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﻗﻮﻱ“ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻀﺎﺩ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺠﻌﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺤﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻣﻀﺎﺩ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫)‪(REC MENU‬‬
‫‪108‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ )ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪3 “r REC MENU‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪16M‬‬
‫)‪(٣٤٥٦x٤٦٠٨‬‬
‫‪3:2‬‬
‫)‪(٣٠٧٢x٤٦٠٨‬‬
‫‪16:9‬‬
‫)‪(٢٥٩٢x٤٦٠٨‬‬
‫‪10M‬‬
‫)‪(٢٧٣٦x٣٦٤٨‬‬
‫‪3M‬‬
‫)‪(١٥٣٦x٢٠٤٨‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺘﺮﺡ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺳﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺻﻬﺎ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (147‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺳﺘﺮ‬
‫‪HDTV‬‬
‫ﺑﻮﺳﺘﺮ‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ‬
‫"‪3.5"×5‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻀﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﺳﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺃﻫﻤﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻫﻮ ”‪.“16M‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”‪ “3:2‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ‪ ،٢:٣‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺭﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ”‪ “HDTV‬ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ“‪ .‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ HDTV‬ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ‪ .٩:١٦‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.HDTV‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﻭﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺘﺮﺣﺔ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻛﺈﺭﺷﺎﺩ ﻓﻘﻂ )ﺩﻗﺔ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪ ٢٠٠‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺻﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪16M‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ”ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻟﻴﻠﻴﺔ ‪ .“HS‬ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”‪ “16M‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻟﻴﻠﻴﺔ ‪ “HS‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪ “10M‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪،3:2‬‬
‫‪16:9‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ”‪ CS‬ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ“ ﺃﻭ ”ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻟﻴﻠﻴﺔ ‪.“HS‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”‪ “٢:٣‬ﺃﻭ ”‪ “٩:١٦‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪ CS‬ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ“ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪ “16M‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ”ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻟﻴﻠﻴﺔ ‪ ،“HS‬ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪ “10M‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫)‪(REC MENU‬‬
‫‪109‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻼﺕ ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻰ “ﺑﻜﺴﻼﺕ”‪ .‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻼﺕ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﻀﺤﺖ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ‪ (L‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻳﻬﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﻛﺒﻜﺴﻼﺕ ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺔ‪x‬ﺑﻜﺴﻼﺕ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻼﺕ‬
‫‪16M‬‬
‫‪ ١٦) ٣٤٥٦x٤٦٠٨‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ(‬
‫‪3M‬‬
‫‪ ٣) ١٥٣٦x٢٠٤٨‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ(‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﺗﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.230‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.111‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.146‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫)‪(REC MENU‬‬
‫‪110‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ )ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪3 “r REC MENU‬‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺟﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺇﻋﻄﺎء ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫• ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﺟﻴﺪ“ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﺮﻉ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺃﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺃﺷﺠﺎﺭ ﻛﺜﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﻣﻌﻘﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﺘﺘﺄﺛﺮ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ )ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ( ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻨﻬﺎ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(230‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪3 “r REC MENU‬‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺇﻣﺎ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻼﺕ(( ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫‪FHD‬‬
‫‪HD‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫)‪(REC MENU‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ‬
‫)ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫‪ ١٤٫٢‬ﻡ ﺏ‪/‬ﺙ‬
‫)‪ ٣٠‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ )‪) (FHD‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(73‬ﻧﺴﺒﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻫﻲ ‪.٩:١٦‬‬
‫‪ ١٠٫٩‬ﻡ ﺏ‪/‬ﺙ‬
‫)‪٣٠ ،٢٠ ،١٥ ،١٢‬‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪) Art Shot‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (64‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺑﻤﺸﻬﺪ ‪ Art Shot‬ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (78‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ )ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ .(HD‬ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻫﻲ‬
‫‪.٩:١٦‬‬
‫• ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪111‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻼﺕ(( ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ‬
‫)ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ(‬
‫‪ ٣٫٨‬ﻡ ﺏ‪/‬ﺙ‬
‫)‪ ٣٠‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ(‬
‫‪STD‬‬
‫‪HS1000‬‬
‫‪ ٤٠٫٠‬ﻡ ﺏ‪/‬ﺙ‬
‫)‪ ١٠٠٠‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ(‬
‫‪HS480‬‬
‫‪ ٤٠٫٠‬ﻡ ﺏ‪/‬ﺙ‬
‫)‪ ٤٨٠‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ(‬
‫‪HS240‬‬
‫‪ ٤٠٫٠‬ﻡ ﺏ‪/‬ﺙ‬
‫)‪ ٢٤٠‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ(‬
‫‪HS120‬‬
‫‪ ٤٠٫٠‬ﻡ ﺏ‪/‬ﺙ‬
‫)‪ ١٢٠‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ(‬
‫‪HS30-240‬‬
‫‪ ٥٫٢‬ﻡ ﺏ‪/‬ﺙ‬
‫)‪ ٣٠‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ(‬
‫‪ ٤٠٫٤‬ﻡ ﺏ‪/‬ﺙ‬
‫)‪ ٢٤٠‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ(‬
‫‪HS30-120‬‬
‫‪ ١٠٫٢‬ﻡ ﺏ‪/‬ﺙ‬
‫)‪ ٣٠‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ(‬
‫‪ ٤٠٫٤‬ﻡ ﺏ‪/‬ﺙ‬
‫)‪ ١٢٠‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ(‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫)‪(REC MENU‬‬
‫‪112‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ‪.٣:٤‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫)ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.((74‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪3 “r REC MENU‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﺘﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻭﻗ ًﺘﺎ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺣﺪّﺓ(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪ 3 “r REC MENU‬ﺣﺪّﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻤﺲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺤﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ‪) ٢+‬ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﺣﺪﺓ( ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) ٢-‬ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﺣﺪﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ )ﺇﺷﺒﺎﻉ(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪3 “r REC MENU‬‬
‫ﺇﺷﺒﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺇﺷﺒﺎﻋﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺷﺒﺎﻋﺎ( ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) ٢-‬ﺍﻷﻗﻞ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻤﺲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻺﺷﺒﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ‪) ٢+‬ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫)‪(REC MENU‬‬
‫‪113‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪ 3 “r REC MENU‬ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻤﺲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻣﻦ ‪) ٢+‬ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺗﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺍﻛﻦ( ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) ٢-‬ﺃﻗﻞ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺗﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺍﻛﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪3 “r REC MENU‬‬
‫ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ( ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻤﺴﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪) ٢+‬ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫‪) ٢‬ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ‬‫ً‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﻌﻴﺪ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺮﻳﺐ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ )ﺯﻭﻭﻡ )‪((SR‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪3 “r REC MENU‬‬
‫ﺯﻭﻭﻡ )‪(SR‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 55‬ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪3 “r REC MENU‬‬
‫ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ‬
‫”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(52‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ‪BEST SHOT‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫)‪(REC MENU‬‬
‫‪114‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺗﻌﺰﻳﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺗﻌﺰﻳﺰ ‪(AF‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪3 “r REC MENU‬‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺗﻌﺰﻳﺰ ‪AF‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺧﺎﻓﺘﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺘﺮﻙ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻀﺎ ًء‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻨﻈﺮ‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻻ ﻳﻐﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪) HDR Art‬ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ )ﺭﺳﻢ ‪((HDR‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪3 “r REC MENU‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪HDR‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 66‬ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺡ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺡ(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪3 “r REC MENU‬‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺡ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺡ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫)‪(REC MENU‬‬
‫‪115‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪3 “r REC MENU‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ ،2‬ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ 2‬ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ 3‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ “1‬ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ“ ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻝ‪ ...‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪ “...‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ “2‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ “1‬ﻛﻨﻮﻉ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ‪Make-up‬‬
‫– ‪ CS‬ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،AF CS ،‬ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ )‪(BEST SHOT‬‬
‫– ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ‪(Art Shot) Art Shot‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ”ﺭﺳﻢ ‪ “HDR‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪ “HDR‬ﻭﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ً‬
‫ﻛﻼ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ”ﺭﺳﻢ ‪ “HDR‬ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ )ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪3 “r REC MENU‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻭﺻﻒ ﻧﺼﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫– ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫– ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫– ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ“‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫)‪(REC MENU‬‬
‫‪116‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪3 “r REC MENU‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺪﺭﺝ ﺇﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ ﻭﺭﺃﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺭﺝ ﺇﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﺭﺝ ﺇﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺭﺝ ﺇﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺷﻔﺎﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻫﻲ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﻛﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺷﻔﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫)‪(REC MENU‬‬
‫‪117‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻳﻤﺜﻞ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻼﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺎﺋﻞ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﺴﺒﺐ‬
‫ﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻜﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ‪ EV‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻗﺪﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻣﻜﺎﻥ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﻟـ ‪) R‬ﺃﺣﻤﺮ( ﻭ‪) G‬ﺃﺧﻀﺮ(‬
‫ﻭ‪) B‬ﺃﺯﺭﻕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﻟﻠﻤﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﺪﺭﺝ ﺇﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻋﺘﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳُﻔﻀﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺪﺭﺝ ﺇﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ”ﺇﻋﺘﺎﻡ“ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﺪﺭﺝ ﺇﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻔﺘﻴﺢ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳُﻔﻀﻲ ﻣﺪﺭﺝ ﺇﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ”ﺗﻔﺘﻴﺢ“ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﺪﺭﺝ ﺇﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻭﻻ ﻳﻀﻤﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺪﺭﺝ ﺇﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﻘﻞ ﻋﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻧﻈﺮﺍً ﻟﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﻟﻠﻤﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫)‪(REC MENU‬‬
‫‪118‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ )ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪3 “r REC MENU‬‬
‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺬﻛﺮﻫﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺗﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻪ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻰ ﻗﻤﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻄﻞ )ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ(‬
‫‪CS‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫‪AF‬‬
‫‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬
‫‪0.0‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻲ‬
‫‪AF‬‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﺱ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫ﺯﻭﻭﻡ‬
‫)‪(SR‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ*‬
‫ﻋﺮﻳﺾ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫* ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫)‪(REC MENU‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫‪119‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 35‬ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪) »/»:‬ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ(‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫]‪) [6] [4‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ‪(.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[2‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‬
‫]‪[SET‬‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ‪/‬ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‬
‫]‪) [6] [4‬ﺗﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺆﻗ ًﺘﺎ‪(.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [2‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪[2] [8‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫]‪(DISP) [8‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺑﻄﻲء(‬
‫]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻲء‪ .‬ﻻ‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫”‪ “HS30-120‬ﺃﻭ ”‪.“HS30-240‬‬
‫ﺯﻭﻭﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ‪.([) z‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻭ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٤٫٥‬ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫]‪[MENU‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪120‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ”ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (146‬ﺃﻭ ”ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(187‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﻟﺒﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗ ًﺘﺎ‬
‫]‪[SET‬‬
‫]‪) [6] [4‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪(.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫]‪) [2] [8‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‬
‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﺧﻔﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫]‪(DISP) [8‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫]‪[MENU‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ MOTION PRINT‬ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺗﺴﻮﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻭﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻭﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪121‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ )‪ ،(CS‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺠﻠﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪/‬ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ*‬
‫* ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ”‪ CS‬ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ“‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪122‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫]‪[6] [4‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[SET‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻭ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ‪ (]) w‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ُﻣﻜﺒﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[MENU‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‪(DISP) [8‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[2‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ”ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ“‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﺆﻗ ًﺘﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﻗﻔﻪ ﻣﺆﻗﺘًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[2‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ”ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ“‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺣﺬﻑ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺣﺬﻑ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫• ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ٣‬ﻭ‪.٤‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪123‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﻗﻔﻪ ﻣﺆﻗﺘًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[2‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ”ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ“‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺣﺬﻑ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻭ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ‪.([) z‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٤‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﻧﻌﻢ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﻻ“ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٦‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﻗﻔﻪ ﻣﺆﻗﺘًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[2‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ”ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ“‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺣﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ“‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﻧﻌﻢ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺣﺬﻑ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪124‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﺘﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [4‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪ ،“p PLAY MENU‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[6‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻠﻒ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻤﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[6‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ٥‬ﻭ‪.٦‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻌﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [4‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪ ،“p PLAY MENU‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[6‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﻧﻌﻢ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[6‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪125‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﻗﻔﻪ ﻣﺆﻗﺘًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[2‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ”ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ“‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﻧﺴﺦ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﻧﺴﺦ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻭﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺗﺴﻮﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪126‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ‪ ([) z‬ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻭ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬
‫‪ w‬ﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻮﺿﺢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻱ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺿﻪ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫– ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻫﻮ ‪ ،8X‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ‬
‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 8X‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [SET‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [SET‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻞ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﻭﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻭ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ً .‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪.[6‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬
‫‪.(]) w‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻭ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [2‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [4‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﻻﻗﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ )‪ ،(CS‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﻬﺎﻡ )?( ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻷﻱ ﺳﺒﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪127‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(96‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻣﺪﻋﻮ ًﻣﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﺪﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫”ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ‪) “HDMI‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(96‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺩﺧﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺧﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻵﻥ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻧﺴﺒﻴًﺎ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻄﻪ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻣﻊ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﻦ ﻭﻗﺎﺑﺲ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻢ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻤﻜ ًﻨﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻤﻮﺻﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ‪ .‬ﻻ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻮﺻﻠﻲ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ‪ HDMI‬ﺑﺒﻌﻀﻬﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺾ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﺮﺝ ‪ .HDMI‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪.HDMI‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪128‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻃﺮﻑ ‪) HDMI‬ﺧﺮﺝ ‪(HDMI‬‬
‫]‪ 3 [MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪ 3 “¥ SETTING‬ﺧﺮﺝ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺑﻜﺎﺑﻞ ‪.HDMI‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﻭﻓﻘﺎً ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ‪ .‬ﻋﺎﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪1080i‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪*1080i‬‬
‫‪480p‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬
‫‪480p‬‬
‫‪576p‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬
‫‪576p‬‬
‫* ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ‪ 1080i‬ﻣﻊ ‪ 1080 60i‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ‪ .1080 50i‬ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻫﻲ ‪ 576p‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ‪ PAL‬ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ‪ .1080i 60i‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ‪ PAL‬ﻭﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.576p‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ“ ﻛﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﺸﻲء ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﺧﺮﺝ ‪ “HDMI‬ﻃﺎﻟﻤﺎ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﺧﺮﺝ ‪.“HDMI‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪129‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )‪(PLAY MENU‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.98‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ )ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ(‬
‫]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪3 “p PLAY MENU‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 152‬ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ )ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ(‬
‫]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪ 3 “p PLAY MENU‬ﻻﻗﻂ ﺃﻣﺎﻣﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ )ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ(‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬
‫ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(135‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(126‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫)‪(PLAY MENU‬‬
‫‪130‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ )ﺇﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ(‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ )ﺇﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬
‫]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪3 “p PLAY MENU‬‬
‫ﺇﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ‪ 3‬ﺇﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻭﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺗﺒ ًﻌﺎ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (134‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺯﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺗﺒ ًﻌﺎ ﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ )‪ +1‬ﺃﻭ ‪.(0‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫• ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻴﻒ ﺳﻴﺒﺪﻭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[6‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺇﻧﺸﺎء“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [MENU‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺇﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺇﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫)‪(PLAY MENU‬‬
‫‪131‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ”‪“0‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ FHD‬ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ‪ .٩:١٦‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬
‫ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪ ٩:١٦‬ﻓﻲ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﺴﺒﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺩﻣﺞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺳﻮﺩﺍء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٩٩٩٩‬ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺆﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻗﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.٩٩٩٩‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺸﺎء ً‬
‫ﺑﻌﻀﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺗﺒ ًﻌﺎ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺠﺮﻱ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ‬
‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺠﻮﺩﺓ ‪ FHD‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ‬
‫– ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫)‪(PLAY MENU‬‬
‫‪132‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺠﻤﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ )ﺇﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ(‬
‫]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪3 “p PLAY MENU‬‬
‫ﺇﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ‪ 3‬ﺇﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻭﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻌﺔ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺗﺒ ًﻌﺎ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (134‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪.[SET‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺇﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺍﻛﺘﻤﻞ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ“‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ .[SET‬ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺇﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ”‪“0‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٩٩٩٩‬ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻣﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻗﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.٩٩٩٩‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻤﻜ ًﻨﺎ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺇﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ”ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪.“.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫)‪(PLAY MENU‬‬
‫‪133‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺮﺍﺯ(‬
‫]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪3 “p PLAY MENU‬‬
‫ﺇﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ‪ 3‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺮﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫)‪(+1‬‬
‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ )ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫)‪(+2‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﻄﺎء ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫)‪(0‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻭ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [SET‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [SET‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺑﺮﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.(0) “ ” ،(+2) “ ” ،(+1) “ ” :‬‬
‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺮﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ ،[SET‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪.[2‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫– ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪HS30-240 ،HS30-120 ،HS1000 ،HS480 ،HS240 ،HS120 ،STD‬‬
‫– ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪Art Shot‬‬
‫– ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫)‪(PLAY MENU‬‬
‫‪134‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ(‬
‫]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪ 3 “p PLAY MENU‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬
‫ﺑﺪء‬
‫ﺑﺪء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬
‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ :‬ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺻﻮﺭ ﻻﻗﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﻣﺎﻋﺪﺍ ‪ :Z‬ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ )‪(CS‬‬
‫‪ T‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫» ﻓﻘﻂ‪ :‬ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫» ﻓﻘﻂ‪ :‬ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪ ٥ ،‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪ ١٠ ،‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪ ١٥ ،‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ ٣٠ ،‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ ٦٠ ،‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ١ :‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ٣‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ٥‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ١٠‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ١٥‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ٢٠‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫”ﺣﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ“‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ”ﺣﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ“‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻻﻗﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺣﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ“‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫)‪(PLAY MENU‬‬
‫‪135‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ :٥‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻸﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﺟﻤﻴﻌﻬﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ٥‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ )ﻋﺪﺍ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻻﻗﻂ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ(‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺠﺎﻫﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ“‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﻛﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”» ﻓﻘﻂ“ ﺃﻭ ”» ﻓﻘﻂ“ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﺻﻮﺭ“ ﺑﻪ‬
‫– ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ”ﺣﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ“ ﺃﻭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫– ﻗﺒﻞ ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ :‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [SET‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ .[MENU‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [MENU‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [2‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [8‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [2‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫)‪(PLAY MENU‬‬
‫‪136‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺑﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ WAV‬ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ ١٦) PCM‬ﺑﺖ‪ ،‬ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ‪ /‬ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ‪ ١١٫٠٢٥ :‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ ٢٢٫٠٥/‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ ٤٤٫١/‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪٩ :‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ SSBGM001.WAV :‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪SSBGM009.WAV‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺤﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪.(180 ،176‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻛﻘﺮﺹ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ )ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ(‪.‬‬
‫• ‪Windows‬‬
‫‪ :Windows 10 1‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ”ﺍﻟﺒﺪء“ ﺛﻢ ”ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ“‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ‬
‫”ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ“‪.‬‬
‫‪ :Windows 8.1‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ”ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ“ ﺛﻢ ”ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ“‪.‬‬
‫‪ :Windows Vista ،Windows 7‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ”ﺑﺪء“ ﺛﻢ ”ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ“‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ”ﻗﺮﺹ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ“‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ً‬
‫ً‬
‫• ‪Macintosh‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ً‬
‫ً‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ”‪ “SSBGM‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺋﻪ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘﺮًﺍ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ ”‪.“SSBGM‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻭﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻭﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ ﻭﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 183‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪.(180 ،177‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫)‪(PLAY MENU‬‬
‫‪137‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬
‫]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ‪ 3‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ ‪3 [MENU] 3‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪ 3 “p PLAY MENU‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺟﺰء ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺺ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬
‫ﻗﺺ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺺ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬
‫ﻗﺺ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﺘﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﻗﺺ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ )ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ( ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻗﺺ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺺ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪ [6] [4‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[SET‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺺ )ﺃﺯﺭﻕ(‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [2‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻗﺺ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺘﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺺ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺺ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[2‬‬
‫ﻗﺺ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ )ﻣﻨﻪ( ﺍﻟﻘﺺ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[2‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍً ﺁﺧﺮﺍً‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ )ﺇﻟﻴﻪ( ﺍﻟﻘﺺ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[2‬‬
‫ﻗﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻣﻨﻪ ﺍﻟﻘﺺ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[2‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﻧﻌﻢ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻜﺘﻤﻞ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻝ‪ ...‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪ “...‬ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺺ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻭﻗﺘﺎً‬
‫ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻃﻮﻳﻼ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﻮﻳﻼ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫)‪(PLAY MENU‬‬
‫‪138‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٥‬ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻌﺪ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺛﻨﻴﻦ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺑﺪء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺺ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [SET‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺆﻗ ًﺘﺎ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [2‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫)‪(PLAY MENU‬‬
‫‪139‬‬
‫ﻟﺪﻣﺞ ﻣﻘﻄﻌﻲ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺩﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬
‫]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ‪ 3‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻣﺠﻬﺎ‪3 [MENU] 3 .‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪ 3 “p PLAY MENU‬ﺩﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺑﺪﻣﺞ ﻣﻘﻄﻌﻲ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺯﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٠‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻘﻄﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺪﻣﺞ ﻣﻘﻄﻌﻲ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻣﺠﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺩﻣﺠﻬﺎ )ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ( ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [MENU‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺇﻧﺸﺎء“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،١‬ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﺄﺛﺮ ﻣﻘﻄﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[MENU‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺩﻣﺞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺠﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ‪ Art Shot‬ﺃﻭ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ً‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺩﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺘﺄﺛﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺪﻣﺞ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺷﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻣﺞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻜﺘﻤﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪FHD‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫)‪(PLAY MENU‬‬
‫‪،HD‬‬
‫‪140‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )‪(MOTION PRINT‬‬
‫]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ‪ 3‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪3 “p PLAY MENU‬‬
‫‪MOTION PRINT‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‬
‫ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟـﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪.MOTION PRINT‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺇﻧﺸﺎء“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪.MOTION PRINT‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ‪ 3‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪3 “p PLAY MENU‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﺘﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ‪) ٠‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ( ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) ٢+‬ﺳﺎﻃﻊ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(113‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻹﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ )ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ( ﻛﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗُﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫)‪(PLAY MENU‬‬
‫‪141‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ )ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ(‬
‫]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ‪ 3‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪3 “p PLAY MENU‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ¤‬ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﺎﺥ ﺻﺎﻑ‬
‫' ﻏﺎﺋﻢ ﺟﺰﺋ ًﻴﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ‪ ،‬ﻏﺎﺋﻢ ﻭﻳﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﺳﻘﻮﻁ ﺃﻣﻄﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﻇﻼﻝ ﺍﻷﺷﺠﺎﺭ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫“ ﻇﻞ‬
‫ﺿﻮء ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻇﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫† ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎء ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫– ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺿﻮء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫« ﺗﻨﺠﺴﺘﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗُﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪.(42‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫)‪(PLAY MENU‬‬
‫‪142‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ )ﺳﻄﻮﻉ(‬
‫]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ‪ 3‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪3 “p PLAY MENU‬‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ( ﺇﻟﻰ –‪) ٢‬ﺍﻷﻗﻞ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻤﺴﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ‪) ٢+‬ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗُﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪(DPOF‬‬
‫]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ‪ 3‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪3 “p PLAY MENU‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪DPOF‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 170‬ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫)‪(PLAY MENU‬‬
‫‪143‬‬
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ )ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ(‬
‫]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪ 3 “p PLAY MENU‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ›‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪.٢‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ .[MENU‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ”ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ“ ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ”ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻣﺤﻤﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(193‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﻗﻔﻪ ﻣﺆﻗﺘًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[2‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ”ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ“‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ›‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [MENU‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻣﺤﻤﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(193‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫)‪(PLAY MENU‬‬
‫‪144‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻜﻞ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﻗﻔﻪ ﻣﺆﻗﺘًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[2‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ›‪.‬‬
‫• ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ”ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ“ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٤‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪.[SET‬‬
‫• ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻣﺤﻤﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(193‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ /‬ﻭﻗﺖ(‬
‫]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ‪ 3‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪3 “p PLAY MENU‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ /‬ﻭﻗﺖ‬
‫]‪[2] [8‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[6] [4‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺭﻏﺒﺘﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﻊ ”ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ ١٢‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭ‪ ٢٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ”)‪ “am (pm‬ﻭ”‪) “24h‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺃﺣﺪﻫﺎ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[SET‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﻤﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(187‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٩٨٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.٢٠٤٩‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫)‪(PLAY MENU‬‬
‫‪145‬‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ(‬
‫]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ‪ 3‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪3 [MENU] 3‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪ 3 “p PLAY MENU‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺆﺩﻱ ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [SET‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ ٩٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻻ ﻳﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ )ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻩ( ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ )ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ(‬
‫]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ‪ 3‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪3 “p PLAY MENU‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻛﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ 10M :‬ﻭ‪ 3M‬ﻭ‪.VGA‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ‪ ٢:٣‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ٩:١٦‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ‪ ٣:٤‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺺ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻤﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻫﻮ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ‪.MOTION PRINT‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫)‪(PLAY MENU‬‬
‫‪146‬‬
‫ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ )ﺗﺴﻮﻳﺔ(‬
‫]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ‪ 3‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪3 “p PLAY MENU‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻤﺜﻞ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻭ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺻﻪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫• ﺳﺘﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ ٢:٣‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ٩:١٦‬ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬
‫ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ‪.٣:٤‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺻﻬﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺰء ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ )ﻧﺴﺦ(‬
‫]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ‪ 3‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪3 [MENU] 3‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪ 3 “p PLAY MENU‬ﻧﺴﺦ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻨﺴﺦ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﺳﻤﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻻﻗﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ )‪) (CS‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(126‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﻧﺴﺦ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫)‪(PLAY MENU‬‬
‫‪147‬‬
‫ﺩﻣﺞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ )ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻻﻗﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ(‬
‫]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ‪ 3‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻻﻗﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ‪3 [MENU] 3‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪ 3 “p PLAY MENU‬ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪ CS‬ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺇﻧﺸﺎء“‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻻﻗﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ (٣٤٥٦x٤٦٠٨) 16M‬ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻻﻗﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ )‪ ٥‬ﺭﺃﺳﻲ ‪ ٦ x‬ﺃﻓﻘﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻻﻗﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ‬
‫”ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ“ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻻﻗﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ )ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻻﻗﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ )ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ(‬
‫]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪ 3 “p PLAY MENU‬ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 125‬ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻻﻗﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ )ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ(‬
‫]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪ 3 “p PLAY MENU‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪ :DPOF‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪170‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪ :‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪145‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪ :‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪126‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ‪ :‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪123‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫)‪(PLAY MENU‬‬
‫‪148‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ )ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻼ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺪﻣﺠﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ EXILIM Connect‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪.Bluetooth® Smart‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ Bluetooth‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪.Bluetooth Smart‬‬
‫• ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬
‫‪ ،Bluetooth Smart‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﻭﺇﺟﺮﺍء‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ LAN‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻭﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫‪) EXILIM Connect‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(151‬‬
‫‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪LAN‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻣﻘﺘﺮﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻴﺔ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺘﺮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(159‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ Scene‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻟﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ( ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(167‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫)ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ(‬
‫‪149‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(158‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(162‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫ﻭﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻟﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(162‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻃﺎﺋﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻈﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻃﺮﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺸﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫)ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ(‬
‫‪150‬‬
‫• ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﻴﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻃﺮﻓﻲ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪:Android‬‬
‫– ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ‬
‫”‪.“EXILIM Connect‬‬
‫– ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪.(MOV‬‬
‫– ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺔ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺘﺎﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺎﻑ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺣﻮﻝ ‪EXILIM Connect‬‬
‫‪،EXILIM Connect‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ‬
‫)ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫‪EXILIM Connect‬‬
‫‪http://www.exilim.com/manual/‬‬
‫• ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻟﺘﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ ،EXILIM Connect‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ‪.Adobe Reader‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ CASIO‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪.PDF‬‬
‫• ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺃﺩﻟﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ EXILIM Connect‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ EXILIM Connect‬ﺑﻠﻐﺘﻚ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﻠﻐﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫)ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ(‬
‫‪151‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺗﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[4‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪ “r REC MENU‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪ “p PLAY MENU‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[6‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ“‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻭ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(162‬‬
‫ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(155‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(158‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫)ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ(‬
‫‪152‬‬
‫‪.(163‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺼﻒ ﺷﻔﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﺷﻔﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺼﻒ ﺷﻔﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ LAN‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﺷﻔﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ LAN‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﺷﻔﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ LAN‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﺷﻔﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﺷﻔﺎﻑ‬
‫”ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ“ ﻣﻤﻜﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫)ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ(‬
‫‪153‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ‪ EXILIM Connect‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬
‫‪ EXILIM Connect‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Google Play‬ﺃﻭ ‪ App Store‬ﻭﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )‪ Android‬ﻭ‪ (iOS‬ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬
‫‪ ،EXILIM Connect‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ‪ Google Play‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،App Store‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻤﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ CASIO‬ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ )‪.(http://www.exilim.com/‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﻲ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪EXILIM Connect‬‬
‫• ﺗﺨﻀﻊ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻭﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ EXILIM Connect‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‬
‫‪ .‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻃﺮﻓﻲ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪Android‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ”‪.“EXILIM Connect‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ‪.EXILIM Connect‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ”‪.(Google Play) “Play Store‬‬
‫‪(iOS) iPhone .‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ”‪.“EXILIM Connect‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ‪.EXILIM Connect‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ”‪.“App Store‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫)ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ(‬
‫‪154‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺃﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪Bluetooth Smart‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ )ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻥ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(156‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻃﺮﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺘﺮﻥ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻈﻞ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻭ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻥ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺣﺪﺩ ”ﺑﺪء“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(152‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ”‪.“Pairing‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺒﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪.EXILIM Connect‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫‪) EXILIM Connect‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(151‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪.٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫)ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ(‬
‫‪155‬‬
‫‪.٨‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ“‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺃﻭ ًﻻ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺨﻄﻂ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪Bluetooth Smart‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ )ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‪.‬‬
‫‪SSID‬‬
‫ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [2‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [4‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(152‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺑﺪء ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻭﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪ SSID‬ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‬
‫‪SSID‬‬
‫ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪ SSID‬ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ “.‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﻌﻠﻪ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻜﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﺩ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫)ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ(‬
‫‪156‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺠﺐ ﻓﻌﻠﻪ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ LAN‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻫﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﺑﺈﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ SSID‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ LAN‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻲ‬
‫– ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ LAN‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻋﺎﻡ‬
‫– ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ LAN‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫)ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ(‬
‫‪157‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻛﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ(‬
‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء‬
‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻋﻼﻭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻟﻼﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪) EXILIM Connect‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(151‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ”‪.“Remote Capture‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺒﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪.EXILIM Connect‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ”ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ“‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫‪) EXILIM Connect‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(151‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻭ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ“‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(152‬‬
‫]‪.[SET‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺑﺪء ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ“‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ LAN‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٥‬ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ SSID‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫‪ LAN‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺒﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪.EXILIM Connect‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ”ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ“‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫‪) EXILIM Connect‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(151‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫)ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ(‬
‫‪158‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻘﺘﺮﻥ )ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻴﺔ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻘﺘﺮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻣﻘﺘﺮﻥ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪ ،Bluetooth‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫”‪ .“Scene Server‬ﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،Scene sever‬ﺃﻧﺖ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ Scene‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺘﺮﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻣﻘﺘﺮﻧﺔ ﺑـ )‪ ،iOS) iPhone‬ﻓﺄﻧﺖ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ iPhone‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ EXILIM Connect‬ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ Scene‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪) EXILIM Connect‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(151‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻭ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ“‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻭ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺘﻬﺎ ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(152‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺗﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ]‪.([) [z‬‬
‫• ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.Scene Server‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ QR‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪء ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ QR‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ QR‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﻧﻌﻢ“‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ QR‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫• ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻓﺸﻠﺖ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻷﻱ ﺳﺒﺐ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻻ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫)ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ(‬
‫‪159‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﻪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ QR‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺭﺉ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ‪ QR‬ﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪.QR‬‬
‫‪.٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ URL‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪.QR‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺭﻣﺰ ‪.QR‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﻣﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺑﺈﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ‪ ٥٠٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪ Scene server‬ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ Scene‬ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫)ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ(‬
‫‪160‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫)ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺑﺈﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ‪ ٥٠٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻭ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [2‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [4‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(152‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ‪.([) z‬‬
‫• ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ”ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ“‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫‪) EXILIM Connect‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(151‬‬
‫• ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ” “ )ﺗﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(13‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫)ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ(‬
‫‪161‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫)ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ LAN‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ‬
‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻲ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻻ‬
‫ﻳﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ EXILIM Connect‬ﻣﺜﺒ ًﺘﺎ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻭ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(152‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪.URL‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ “.‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﻬﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻚ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(155‬‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٦٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺼﺒﺢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [SET‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ URL‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫‪URL‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻃﺮﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺪء ‪ EXILIM Connect‬ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫‪) EXILIM Connect‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(151‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻫﺎ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪LAN‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫)ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ(‬
‫‪162‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻭﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻭ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(152‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻨﻪ ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [MENU‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ(‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ‪ :‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻄﻼ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ ﻟﺘﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺻﺪﻭﺭ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺸﺄﺓ ﻃﺒﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺎﺋﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫)ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ(‬
‫‪163‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ )ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ‪ :‬ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ” “ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫]‪ [SET‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ“ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ“‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ” “ )ﺗﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(13‬‬
‫• ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ”ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ“‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(155‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫)ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ(‬
‫‪164‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ‪ .Bluetooth Smart‬ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ً‬
‫ﻛﻼ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫‪ Bluetooth‬ﻭﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ LAN‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ LAN‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪X :‬‬
‫– ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪V :‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ”ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ“‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(166‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫– ‪ :iPhone‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫– ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻃﺮﻓﻲ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪ :Android‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(163‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ“‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ“ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫”ﺍﻟﻜﻞ“ ﺃﻭ ”ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺃﻭﻻ“ً ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺍﻟﻜﻞ“ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺘﻰ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺎﻭﻟﺖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [ON/OFF‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫)ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ(‬
‫‪165‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ‪ :‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻤﺴﺔ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻟﻪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺍﻟﻜﻞ“ ﻟﻺﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫‪»T‬‬
‫ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪ T‬ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫‪ T‬ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻠﻔﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻭﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪*LCD‬‬
‫‪ T‬ﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﺖ‬
‫ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﺖ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ*‬
‫‪ T‬ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﺖ‬
‫ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ*‬
‫* ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (106‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺘﻌﻄﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ )ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ(‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ‪ :‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ”ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ“ ﺃﻭ ”ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ“ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ”ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ“‪.‬‬
‫‪3M‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ‪ 3M‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺠﻢ ‪ 3M‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫)ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ(‬
‫‪166‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ )ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ(‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ‪ :‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻟﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ )ﺧﻄﻮﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ( ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ“ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(155‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ“‪ ،‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‬
‫ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺣﻴﺚ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺑﻨﺠﺎﺡ ﺃﻭ ﻻ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٠٠٠٠‬ﺳﺠﻞ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ‪ ١٠٠٠٠‬ﺳﺠﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﻗﺪﻡ ﺳﺠﻞ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺬﺭﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺸﺮ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻦ ً‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻼﺣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫)ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ(‬
‫‪167‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ LAN‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ )ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ‪(WLAN‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ‪ :‬ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ‪WLAN‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺘﺮﻥ ﺑﻬﺎ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(169‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(155‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﻚ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ ،Bluetooth Smart‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‬
‫ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬
‫– ‪:iPhone‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﻘﻞ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ SSID‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ SSID‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻭﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻃﺮﻓﻲ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪:Android‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻞ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ SSID‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﺴﻴﺎﻥ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫‪ SSID‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻭﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫)ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ(‬
‫‪168‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ )ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ(‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ‪ :‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪) EXILIM Connect‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(151‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻈﻞ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫)ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ(‬
‫‪169‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ*‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ*‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻭﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﺩ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺘﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(170‬‬
‫• ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ‪.Exif Print‬‬
‫• ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ‪.PRINT Image Matching III‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ DPOF‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ )ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪(DPOF‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )‪(DPOF‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ‪ DPOF‬ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﺍً ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺧﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ‪ DPOF‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺎﺏ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻗﺪﺭﺗﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ DPOF‬ﺃﻭ ﻻ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ‪.DPOF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪170‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ DPOF‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ‪ 3‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪3 “p PLAY MENU‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪ 3 DPOF‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ .٩٩‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ ٠٠‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ﻟﺨﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ DPOF‬ﻟﻜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ‪ 3‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪3 “p PLAY MENU‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪ 3 DPOF‬ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ .٩٩‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ ٠٠‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻻﻗﻂ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ﻟﺨﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪171‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﻗﻔﻪ ﻣﺆﻗﺘًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[2‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ”ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ“‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪ “DPOF‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[6‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ .٩٩‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ ٠٠‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ﻟﺨﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ٤‬ﻭ‪ ٥‬ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ DPOF‬ﻟﻜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﻗﻔﻪ ﻣﺆﻗﺘًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[2‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ”ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ“‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻜﻞ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪ “DPOF‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[6‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ .٩٩‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ ٠٠‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ﻟﺨﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪172‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ DPOF‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ًﻴﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪ DPOF‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ DPOF‬ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻨﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ ،DPOF‬ﺣﺪﺩ ”‪ “٠٠‬ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻃﻼﻉ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪!DPOF‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺧﺬﺕ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﺮﺍﻓﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺧﺒﺎﺭﻫﻢ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫‪ DPOF‬ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻔﻌﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ ،DPOF‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺠﺎﻫﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪) DPOF‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(170‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻻ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(187‬‬
‫• ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﻀﻤ ًﻨﺎ ﺩﺍﺋ ًﻤﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺧﺘﻢ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ‪ DPOF‬ﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺘﻢ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺧﺘﻤﻴﻦ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﻟﺨﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻄﻠﺐ ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻃﻠﺐ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﺮﺍﻓﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪173‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪...‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‬
‫• ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ )ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪(USB‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪.(179 ،175‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪(181 ،178‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ‪ ،‬ﺣﺴﺒﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻫﺎ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Windows‬ﻭ‪.Macintosh‬‬
‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻮ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪” Windows‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪ “Windows‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.175‬‬
‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻮ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪” Macintosh‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ‪ “Macintosh‬ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.179‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪174‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪Windows‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻰ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ‪ :‬ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‬
‫‪،Windows 10‬‬
‫‪،Windows 8.1‬‬
‫‪،Windows 7‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪175‬‬
‫‪Windows Vista‬‬
‫‪،Windows 10‬‬
‫‪،Windows 8.1‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪Windows Media Player 12‬‬
‫‪Windows 7‬‬
‫‪Windows Vista‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﺳﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ‪.MOV‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫‪178‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠ ًﻘﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺑﺪﻭﺭﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺰﻭﺩًﺍ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ( ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺭﺉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳًﺎ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻭﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪175‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐّﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺮﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ‬
‫‪USB‬‬
‫‪USB‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻋﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.22‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫)ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [ON/OFF‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(23‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻦ ﺗﻔﺘﺢ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻭﺳﺘﻈﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺛﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻮ ‪ :Windows 10‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ”ﺍﻟﺒﺪء“ ﺛﻢ ”ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ“‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ”ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ“‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻮ ‪ :Windows 8.1‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ”ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ“ ﺛﻢ ”ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ“‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻮ ‪ :Windows Vista ،Windows 7‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ”ﺑﺪء“ ﺛﻢ ”ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ“‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ”ﻗﺮﺹ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ“‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘﺮًﺍ‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻛﻘﺮﺹ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ”ﻧﺴﺦ“ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٧‬ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻮ ‪ :Windows 8.1 ،Windows 10‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ”ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ“‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘﺮًﺍ ﻳﻤﻴﻨﺎً ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ”‪.“DCIM‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻮ ‪ :Windows Vista ،Windows 7‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ”ﺑﺪء“ ﺛﻢ ”ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ“‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ”ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ“ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ”‪ ،“DCIM‬ﻓﺴﺘﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻮﻗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻤﺠﻠﺪ ”‪ “DCIM‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻧﺖ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﻤﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻠﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪176‬‬
‫‪.٨‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻮ ‪ :Windows 8.1 ،Windows 10‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ”ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ“‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ”ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ“ ﺛﻢ ﻓﻮﻕ ”ﻟﺼﻖ“‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻮ ‪ :Windows Vista ،Windows 7‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ”ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ“‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ”ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ“ ﺃﻭ‬
‫”ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ“ ﺛﻢ ﻓﻮﻕ ”ﻟﺼﻖ“‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ”‪) “DCIM‬ﻭﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻳﻬﺎ( ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ”ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ“‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ .‬ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻔﺮ ﺑﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ‪ DCIM‬ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﻤﻪ ﻻﺳﻢ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٩‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪.USB‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻨﺴﺨﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘﺮًﺍ‬
‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘﺮًﺍ‬
‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ”‪ “DCIM‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﻮﺥ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘﺮًﺍ‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺑﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ“ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.183‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻫﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ )ﺑﺪﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻻﻗﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻛﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪177‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ً‬
‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻘﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺑﻨﺴﺨﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﺖ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ‪ Windows 10‬ﻭ‪ Windows 8.1‬ﻭ‪ ،Windows 7‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪.Windows Media Player 12‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﻭﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ‪ ،MOV‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻳًﺎ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫‪Windows 7 ،Windows 8.1 ،Windows 10‬‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ”‪ “FHD‬ﺃﻭ ”‪:“HD‬‬
‫‪ ٣٫٠ Core 2 Duo‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ”‪ “STD‬ﺃﻭ ”‪:“HS‬‬
‫‪ ٣٫٢ Pentium 4‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻫﻲ ﺑﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻀﻤﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻢ ﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻢ‬
‫ﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻢ ﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺖ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ”‪.“STD‬‬
‫– ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﺩﻭﻣﺎً ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ‪ HDMI‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪178‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ‪Macintosh‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻰ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ‪:‬‬
‫ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫‪ Macintosh‬ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‬
‫‪OS X‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪179‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫‪ Macintosh‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪/‬ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪OS X‬‬
‫‪ Photos‬ﺃﻭ‪ ،iPhoto‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺮﺩ ً‬
‫ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺎ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ‪.Macintosh‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪ OS X 10.5‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪QuickTime Player‬‬
‫)ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ(‬
‫–‬
‫‪181‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠ ًﻘﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺑﺪﻭﺭﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻊ ‪ Mac OS X 10.0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ .10.4‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻊ ‪ Mac OS 10.5‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫)ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺰﻭﺩًﺍ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ( ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺭﺉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳًﺎ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻭﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪179‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺮﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Macintosh‬ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ‬
‫‪USB‬‬
‫‪USB‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻋﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.22‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫)ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [ON/OFF‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(23‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻦ ﺗﻔﺘﺢ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻭﺳﺘﻈﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Macintosh‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ( ﻛﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺷﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Mac OS‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Macintosh‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺛﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ”‪ “DCIM‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺴﺤﺐ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﻼﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘﺮًﺍ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪.USB‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪180‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﻮﺧﺔ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ”‪ “DCIM‬ﻟﻔﺘﺤﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘﺮًﺍ‬
‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘﺮًﺍ‬
‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘﺮًﺍ‬
‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘﺮًﺍ‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺑﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ“ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.183‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Macintosh‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻫﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ )ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻻﻗﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻛﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ً‬
‫ﻧﻘﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺑﻨﺴﺨﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Macintosh‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ً‬
‫ً‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻳًﺎ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Mac OS X 10.5 :‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ‪) QuickTime Player :‬ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ(‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻫﻲ ﺑﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻀﻤﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻢ ﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻢ ﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﻮﺩﻳﻼﺕ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬
‫ﻓﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ”‪.“STD‬‬
‫– ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪.Macintosh‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺖ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Macintosh‬ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ‪ HDMI‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Macintosh‬ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Macintosh‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻢ ﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪181‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﻠﻒ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻭﻣﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﻢ ﻓﺮﻳﺪ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺑﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(183‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ٩٩٩٩‬ﻣﻠﻒ ﻛﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺑﺄﺳﻤﺎء ﻣﻦ‬
‫‪ CIMG0001‬ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ .CIMG9999‬ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻻﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺩﺱ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﻦ‪:‬‬
‫‪CIMG0 02 6.JPG‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ‬
‫)‪ ٤‬ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ 100CASIO‬ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ‪.999CASIO‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﻔﻆ ‪ ٩٠٠‬ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻛﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺋﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪1 00 CASI O‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ )‪ ٣‬ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ(‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﻜﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.13‬‬
‫• ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﻭﺳﻌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪182‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪.(DCF) Design Rule for Camera File System‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ‪DCF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ .DCF‬ﻻﺣﻆ‪ ،‬ﺃﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﺣﻮﺍﻝ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﻄﻲ ‪ CASIO‬ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ DCF‬ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺼﻨﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ DCF‬ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺼﻨﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ DCF‬ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺑﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ‪DCIM‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪100CASIO‬‬
‫‪CIMG0001.JPG‬‬
‫‪CIMG0002.MOV‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫‪101CASIO‬‬
‫‪102CASIO‬‬
‫‪DCIM‬‬
‫‪EXILIM‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫* ‪HL_DATA‬‬
‫‪MD2016‬‬
‫‪MD01010E.CMI‬‬
‫‪MD01010T.CMI‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪DPOF‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻒ ‪DPOF‬‬
‫‪MD2017‬‬
‫‪MISC‬‬
‫‪AUTPRINT.MRK‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫‪SSBGM‬‬
‫‪SSBGM001.WAV‬‬
‫‪SSBGM002.WAV‬‬
‫* ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺇﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪183‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‬
‫• ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻠﺘﻘﻄﻬﺎ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫• ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪DCF‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻟﻮ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ .DCF‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻤﻀﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫• ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ‪ DCIM‬ﻭﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺗﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺑﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻴﺪﺓ ﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ‪ DCIM‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻗﺮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﻻﺣﻘﺎً ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ‪ DCIM‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﻤﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ .DCIM‬ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ ‪ .DCIM‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ‪ DCIM‬ﻣﺎ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺻﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﻨﺴﺨﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ”ﺑﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ“ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 183‬ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪184‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )‪(SETTING‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.98‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﻭﺿﻊ ‪(ECO‬‬
‫]‪ 3 [MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪ 3 “¥ SETTING‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ECO‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،ECO‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ”‪ “e‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺘﻰ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ”ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ “ECO‬ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ”ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ“ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ”ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.“ECO‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ“‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ”ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ “ECO‬ﻣﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(189‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(188‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﺷﺎﺷﺔ(‬
‫]‪ 3 [MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪ 3 “¥ SETTING‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪٢+‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻭﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎً ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ ،١+‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻳﺴﺮﺍً‪ .‬ﻳﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١+‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪.٠‬‬
‫‪٠‬‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫–‪١‬‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻡ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ”ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) “ECO‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (185‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﺷﺎﺷﺔ“ ‪ ٢+‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ١+‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫”ﺷﺎﺷﺔ“ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.٠‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫)‪(SETTING‬‬
‫‪185‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ(‬
‫]‪ 3 [MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪ 3 “¥ SETTING‬ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪ :٥ - ١‬ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ )ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(٥‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ .‬ﻳُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻛﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(128‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺧﺮﺝ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(128‬‬
‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺘﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭ )ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ(‬
‫]‪ 3 [MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪ 3 “¥ SETTING‬ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺑﺮﻗﻢ ﻓﺮﻳﺪ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(182‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫)‪(SETTING‬‬
‫‪186‬‬
‫ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ )ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ(‬
‫]‪ 3 [MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪ 3 “¥ SETTING‬ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺨﺘﻢ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺧﺘﻤﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ ١٠ :‬ﻳﻮﻟﻴﻮ‪ ١:٢٥ ،٢٠١٧ ،‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫‪١٠/٧/٢٠١٧‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ‬
‫‪١٠/٧/٢٠١٧‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫‪1:25 pm‬‬
‫• ﺣﺘﻰ ﻟﻮ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﺒﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ DPOF‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(173‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺘﻢ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (191‬ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(191‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ‪ BEST SHOT‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫]‪ 3 [MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪ 3 “¥ SETTING‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫)‪(SETTING‬‬
‫‪187‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺭﻗﻢ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ ﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ )ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ(‬
‫]‪ 3 [MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪ 3 “¥ SETTING‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(182‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﺬﻛﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻭﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ ﺍﻷﻛﺒﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ ﺍﻷﻛﺒﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺘﺬﻛﺮﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ ﺍﻷﻛﺒﺮ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.١‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠٠٠١‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺄﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻛﺒﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.١‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ )ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ(‬
‫]‪ 3 [MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪ 3 “¥ SETTING‬ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ )ﺃﺧﻀﺮ( ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ٣٠ :‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺘﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﻄﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ“‪(.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫– ﺃُﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ‬
‫– ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫– ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ً‬
‫ﻛﻼ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫)‪(SETTING‬‬
‫‪188‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫]‪ 3 [MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪ 3 “¥ SETTING‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺘﺎﻥ‪ ٥ ،‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪ ١٠ ،‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ )ﺩﺍﺋ ًﻤﺎ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ ٥‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪(.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺃُﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ‬
‫– ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬
‫– ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻻﻗﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫– ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫– ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫– ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ(‬
‫]‪ 3 [MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪ 3 “¥ SETTING‬ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺘﻰ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺘﻰ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪(PLAY) [p‬‬
‫]‪ 3 [MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪PLAY 3 “¥ SETTING‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺘﻰ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺘﻰ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺘﻰ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ“‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫)‪(SETTING‬‬
‫‪189‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ )ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ(‬
‫]‪ 3 [MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪ 3 “¥ SETTING‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ‬
‫( ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ”ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ“‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [2‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ“ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ“‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (193‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫)ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ“ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ“( ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ )ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻋﺎﻟﻤﻲ(‬
‫]‪ 3 [MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪ 3 “¥ SETTING‬ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻋﺎﻟﻤﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻮﻃﻨﻚ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺎﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺭﺣﻠﺔ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ‪ ١٦٢‬ﻣﺪﻳﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ‪ ٣٢‬ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[6‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺪﻳﻨﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ”ﻣﺤﻠﻲ“‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﻣﺪﻳﻨﺔ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[6‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫• ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ“ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻔﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻳُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻔﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺠﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺃﺷﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻒ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪[2‬‬
‫”ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺻﻴﻔﻲ“‬
‫”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [MENU‬ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺴﻜﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺑﻜﺜﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﻣﺤﻠﻲ“ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﻭﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(191‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫)‪(SETTING‬‬
‫‪190‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ(‬
‫]‪ 3 [MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪ 3 “¥ SETTING‬ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [SET‬ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[2] [8‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫]‪[6] [4‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ ١٢‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭ‪ ٢٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ”)‪ “am (pm‬ﻭ”‪) “24h‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺃﺣﺪﻫﺎ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺑﺪء ﻣﻦ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ ٢٠٠١‬ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ‪.٢٠٤٩‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻙ ﻟﻤﺪﻳﻨﺘﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (190‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺪﻳﻨﺔ ﺧﺎﻃﺌﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﻳﻨﺘﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺼﺒﺢ ﺃﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻮﺍﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﺪﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (190‬ﺧﺎﻃﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ(‬
‫]‪ 3 [MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪ 3 “¥ SETTING‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ ١٠ :‬ﻳﻮﻟﻴﻮ‪٢٠١٧ ،‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﻡ‪/‬ﺷﻬﺮ‪/‬ﺳﻨﺔ‬
‫‪17/7/10‬‬
‫ﺳﻨﺔ‪/‬ﺷﻬﺮ‪/‬ﻳﻮﻡ‬
‫‪10/7/17‬‬
‫ﺳﻨﺔ‪/‬ﻳﻮﻡ‪/‬ﺷﻬﺮ‬
‫‪7/10/17‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫)‪(SETTING‬‬
‫‪191‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )‪(Language‬‬
‫]‪ 3 [MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪Language 3 “¥ SETTING‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ ”‪.“¥‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ”‪.“Language‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻃﺮﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗُﺒﺎﻉ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻃﺮﻑ ‪) HDMI‬ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ‪(HDMI‬‬
‫]‪ 3 [MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪ 3 “¥ SETTING‬ﺧﺮﺝ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫• ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 129‬ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫)‪(SETTING‬‬
‫‪192‬‬
‫‪23‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ )ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ(‬
‫]‪ 3 [MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪ 3 “¥ SETTING‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﺘﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﺘﺆﺩﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺣﺎﺟﺘﻚ ﻷﻱ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﺘﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫• ﺳﺘﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺃﻱ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫• ﺳﺘﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ )ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ“ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫”ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ((190‬ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺎ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻢ‬
‫• ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻟﻴﺲ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻧﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ )ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‬
‫]‪ 3 [MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪ 3 “¥ SETTING‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 219‬ﻟﻺﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ‪ ،‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ(‬
‫]‪ 3 [MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪ 3 “¥ SETTING‬ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻭﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ MAC‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ MAC‬ﻳﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻛﻤﻌﺮﻑ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫)‪(SETTING‬‬
‫‪193‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫*ﺧﻄﺮ‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﻫﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻄﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻓﺎﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﺔ‪.‬‬
‫*ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻭﻓﺎﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫ﻭﺗﺠﺎﻫﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫*ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻠﻒ‬
‫ﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻭﺗﺠﺎﻫﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‬
‫!‬
‫‪$‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰ )‪ (-‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ‪ .‬ﻳﺤﻈﺮ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺗﻤﺎ ًﻣﺎ‪) .‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻈﺮ ﺗﻔﻜﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍء )‪ (0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ‪) .‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪(.‬‬
‫*ﺧﻄﺮ‬
‫‪ .‬ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫• ﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺷﺤﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﺬﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻟﺤﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺪﻫﻮﺭ ﺃﺩﺍﺋﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺼﻤﻤﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ CASIO‬ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺪﻫﻮﺭ ﺃﺩﺍﺋﻬﺎ ﻭﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪194‬‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫‪%‬‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫*ﺧﻄﺮ‬
‫•‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﺧﻔﺎﻕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺳﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺯﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻬﺐ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺸﺤﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺑﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺷﻴﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺷﺄﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء )ﺳﻼﺳﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻖ‪ ،‬ﻗﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺭﺻﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ(‪.‬‬
‫– ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺑﺘﻔﻜﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺧﺰﻫﺎ ﺑﺈﺑﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻬﺎ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﻄﺮﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﻮﻑ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ‪...‬ﺍﻟﺦ( ﻭﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺑﻠﺤﺎﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻲء ﺁﺧﺮ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺑﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻓﺮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻭﻳﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺼﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻻﺣﻈﺖ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺍﺋﺤﺔ ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﺒﻌﺎﺙ ﺳﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺍً ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻬﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺸﻮﻑ‪ً .‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻔﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺃﻋﺮﺍﺽ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺳﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺪﻫﻮﺭ ﺃﺩﺍﺋﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ً .‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﻔﺎﺥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻳﺼﻌﺐ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻴﻨﻴﻚ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﻚ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﻓﻮﺭﺍً ﺑﺸﻄﻔﻬﻤﺎ ﺑﻤﺎء ﺻﻨﺒﻮﺭ ﻧﻈﻴﻒ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺐ‪.‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪195‬‬
‫*ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺪﺧﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺍﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﻷﻋﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻨﺒﻌﺚ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺧﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺍﺋﺤﺔ ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺳﺨﻮﻧﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻨﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﻓﻮﺭﺍً ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ً .‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﺭﺍ ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻧﻔﺴﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻺﺻﺎﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻛﻦ ً‬
‫ﺑﺤﺮﻭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ CASIO‬ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻻﺑﺘﻌﺎﺩ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻴﺮﺍﻥ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﻨﻴﺮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺨﻄﺮ‬
‫ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪$‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺳﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻲ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺤﺎﺩﺙ ﺧﻄﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻋﺜﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻋﺜﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻏﺎﺯ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬
‫ﻟﻼﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻼﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺧﻄﺮ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺑﺈﻃﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻋﺜﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻳﻘﻮﺩ ﺳﻴﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺨﻄﺮ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺣﺎﺩﺙ‪.‬‬
‫‬‫‬‫‪-‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪USB‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺳﻮء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬
‫ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫– ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻤﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬
‫‪.USB‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﺃﻭ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻙ‬
‫– ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺗﻤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫– ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺴﺨﻴﻦ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺳﻮء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻔﻪ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺨﻄﺮ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ‬
‫ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫– ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺛﻘﻴﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻪ ﻟﻠﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﻛﻪ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺛﻨﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻄﻲ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻌﺜﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺃﺣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪USB‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺨﻄﺮ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪196‬‬
‫*ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻳﺪﻳﻚ ﻣﺒﻠﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ‬
‫ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ CASIO‬ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﺽ* ﻻﻧﺴﻜﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺍﺋﻞ ﻓﻮﻗﻪ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺍﺋﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺨﻄﺮ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺍﺋﻞ‪ :‬ﻣﺎء ﺃﻭ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﺑﺎﺕ ﺭﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻮﻝ ﺣﻴﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺣﻴﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻟﻴﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﻧﺎء ﺯﻫﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺣﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﺎء ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ .USB‬ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺨﻄﺮ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺳﻠﻚ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫"‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫‬‫‪%‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫• ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺮﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺷﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﻭﻓﻮﻟﺘﻴﺔ ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻠﻚ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺨﻄﺮ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﻋﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻭﺿﻌﻪ ﺑﻌﻴﺪًﺍ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻴﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﻴﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﻟﻴﻒ ﺑﻤﻀﻎ‬
‫ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻨﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒﺔ‬
‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺍﺋﻞ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒﺔ )ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ( ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻨﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﻓﻮﺭﺍً ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ .‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻋﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻘﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺠﻠﻴﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻣﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‪ً .‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﺭﺍ ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻧﻔﺴﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻛﻦ ً‬
‫ﻟﻺﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺤﺮﻭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ CASIO‬ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﻔﻜﻴﻚ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺑﻤﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺄﻱ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺤﺮﻭﻕ ﻭﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﻙ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺤﺺ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪CASIO‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫‪%‬‬
‫!‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪197‬‬
‫*ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺴﻘﻮﻁ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻬﺎ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﺴﻘﻮﻃﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻗﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺧﻄﺮ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﻓﻮﺭﺍً ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‪ً .‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﺭﺍ ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻧﻔﺴﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻛﻦ ً‬
‫ﻟﻺﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺤﺮﻭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ CASIO‬ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫• ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻷﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺑﺘﻼﻋﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺿﻊ ﻭﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﻌﻴﺪًﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺑﺘﻼﻉ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺒﻴﺐ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺩﺍﻓﺌﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺆﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻼﻣﺴﺘﻬﺎ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺤﺮﻭﻕ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻻﺣﻈﺖ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻛﻬﺮﻭﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻘﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴًﺎ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ( ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩ ﻟﻸﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻙ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺸﺄﺓ ﻃﺒﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻃﺎﺋﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻠﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻭﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻌﺜﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ‬
‫ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺣﺎﺩﺙ‪.‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫‬‫‪+‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪198‬‬
‫*ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻤﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺨﻄﺮ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺣﺎﺩﺙ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﻴﺪًﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺷﺨﺺ‬
‫ﻳﺮﺗﺪﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺿﺮﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﺐ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺿﺮﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﺐ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺷﻌﺮﺕ ﺑﺄﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻻﺑﺘﻌﺎﺩ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺒﻴﺐ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻄﺎﺭ ﻣﺰﺩﺣﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﺰﺩﺣﻢ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺠﻠﺲ ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭ ﺷﺨﺺ‬
‫ﻳﺮﺗﺪﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺿﺮﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﺐ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴًﺎ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ( ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺿﺮﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﺐ‪.‬‬
‫‬‫‪+‬‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫*ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫‪ .‬ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪USB‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺳﻮء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺨﻄﺮ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫– ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺘﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﺃﻭ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﺤﺎﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺁﺧﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻓﺄﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺳﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻨﻈﻔﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪USB‬‬
‫)ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺑﺲ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺑﺲ(‪.‬‬
‫– ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺎﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺭﺣﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺎﺵ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻜﻨﺴﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺳﻨﻮﻳًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ‪ ،‬ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬
‫ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﻤﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻨﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺸﺪ ﺳﻠﻚ‬
‫– )ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻀﻤﻦ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ( ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‬‫‪+‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪199‬‬
‫*ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫‪ .‬ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺑﺄﻱ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ CASIO‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﻭﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻸﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺿﻊ ﻭﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺭﺿﻊ ﻭﺃﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺻﻐﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻴﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺣﻴﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺃﻟﻴﻒ ﺑﻤﻀﻎ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺤﻮﺍﺩﺙ ﻧﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺑﺲ ﺃﻭ ﻻﻣﺲ ﺍﻟﺠﻠﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻔﻄﻪ ﺑﻤﺎء ﺻﻨﺒﻮﺭ ﻧﻈﻴﻒ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻣﻼﻣﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻬﻴﺞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻠﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫‬‫‪+‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻴﺲ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺎً ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻼﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺨﻄﺮ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻑ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﺇﻟﻰ ﺁﺧﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﻘﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺠﻨﺒﻬﺎ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺑﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻟﻨﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ‬
‫– ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﻌﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﺑﺨﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﻮﺕ‬
‫– ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺎً ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻓﺂﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺠﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺪﻓﺄﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺳﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‬‫‬‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪200‬‬
‫*ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫‪ .‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻬﺎ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻛﺴﺮ ﺯﺟﺎﺝ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺸﻘﻘﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺃﻱ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻻﻟﺘﻬﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺠﻠﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻤﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﻓﻮﺭﺍ ﺑﻤﻀﻤﻀﺔ ﻓﻤﻚ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺒﻴﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻮﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻴﻨﻴﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﺴﻜﺎﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻠﺪﻙ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺷﻄﻒ ً‬
‫ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ ١٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻭﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺒﻴﺐ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻋﻤﻞ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫• ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎً ﺑﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻨﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻄﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ ﻭﺇﻟﻰ ﺁﺧﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻋﺜﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺑﺈﻃﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻋﺜﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻣﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺷﺨﺺ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻔﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺿﻊ ﻭﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺎﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺧﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﻌﻴﺪًﺍ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺘﺮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﺭﺍ ﻛﻲ ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻔﺎﺯﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫• ﻛﻦ ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺤﺮﻭﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﺎﻋﺪ ﺩﺧﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﻃﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻏﺒﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺘﺴﺦ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ‬
‫ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺼﺎﻋﺪ ﺩﺧﺎﻥ ﻭﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺣﺬﺭﺍ ﻛﻲ ﻻ ﺗﻨﺤﺸﺮ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ‬
‫ﻛﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
‫• ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺲ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺄﺛﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﻴﺪًﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪201‬‬
‫‬‫‪1‬‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‪+‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺎ‬
‫– ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫– ﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫– ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻳﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻳﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺄﺧﺮﻯ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(228‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫• ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ٠ :‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫• ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ١٠ :‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) ٪٨٥‬ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻜﺜﻒ(‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﻝ‬
‫– ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻓﺌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‬
‫– ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺳﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻳﻮﻡ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺜﻒ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺎﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﻓﻲ ﻳﻮﻡ ﺷﺘﻮﻱ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺭﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻏﺮﻓﺔ ﺩﺍﻓﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﻄﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻄﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ”ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺜﻒ“ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺑﺪﻭﺭﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﻄﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺜﻒ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺣﻘﻴﺒﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﻏﻠﻘﻬﺎ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻔﻠﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﺒﺔ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺴﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪202‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺪﺵ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻄﻞ ﺁﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﻃﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﺟﺰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺭﺗﺪﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺣﺎﺟﺰ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻐﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻼﺣﻆ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻧﺤﻨﺎء ﻃﻔﻴﻒ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺰﻯ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻄﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺄﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺑﺼﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺴﺎﺥ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﺎﻓﺨﺎً‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻠﻮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺃﻭﺳﺎﺥ ﻭﻏﺒﺎﺭ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺤﻬﻤﺎ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ‬
‫ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﻭﺟﺎﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﻭﺟﺎﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺰﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺐ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ )ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺘﺄﺛﺮ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺘﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻋﺘﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺧﺺ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD.‬ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﺧﺺ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻪ ﻟﻠﺴﺮﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺃﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻳُﻌﺪ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺼﻮﺩ ﻭﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD.‬ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺿﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺼﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺤﻨﺔ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺮﻥ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻭﻳﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺣﻴﺜﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺤﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ‪ ٢٫٤‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻗﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻼ ﻧﻮﻋﻲ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪203‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪http://world.casio.com/r-law/dc/‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﺳﻤﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻭﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻫﻮ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﻭﺻﻔﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻚ ﻣﻊ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻭﻟﺘﻚ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺘﻚ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻗﺪ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺸﺮﺍء ﻃﺮﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻴﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻭﻟﺘﻚ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺘﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻢ ﺷﺮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺨﻄﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻙ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ‪CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD.‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻨﻬﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺘﺎ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺒﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺎﺗﻘﻚ‪ .‬ﻳُﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺗﺨﺎﺫ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺨﻠﺼﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻠﻚ ﻟﻤﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺨﻠﺼﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻄﻴﻢ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﻨﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﻟﻠﺤﺬﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (193‬ﻟﻠﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺳﺎﺧﻨﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻭﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻄﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪204‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‬
‫ﻳُﺤﻈﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺧﺺ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺰﻯ ﺣﻘﻮﻗﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺇﺫﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺎﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﻖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﺇﻻ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳُﺤﻈﺮ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺃﺧﺬ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺤﻔﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺣﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﺭﺽ ﻭﺇﻟﻰ ﺁﺧﺮﻩ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻄﻠﻖ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻟﻮ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻳُﻤﻨﻊ ﻣﻨﻌﺎً ﺑﺎﺗﺎً ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻫﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻧﺸﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﻳﺐ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻌﻬﺎ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺁﺧﺮ‬
‫ﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﺼﺮﻳﺢ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺎﻟﻚ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﻚ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎﻧﺎً‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻭﺇﻟﻰ ﺁﺧﺮﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻛﺎً ﻟﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻵﺧﺮﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD.‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺮﻕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﻟﻶﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻚ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻷﺻﺤﺎﺑﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻴﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ™ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ® ﻓﻲ ﻧﺺ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻌﺪ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ SDXC‬ﻫﻮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.SD-3C, LLC‬‬
‫• ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ‪ Windows‬ﻭ‪ Internet Explorer‬ﻭ‪ Windows Media‬ﻭ‪ Windows Vista‬ﻭ‪Windows 7‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ Windows 8.1‬ﻭ‪ Windows 10‬ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫‪ Microsoft Corporation‬ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺑﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ‪ Macintosh‬ﻭ‪ Mac OS‬ﻭ‪ QuickTime‬ﻭ‪ iPhoto‬ﻭ‪ iPhone‬ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Apple Inc‬‬
‫• ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ‪ Adobe‬ﻭ‪Reader‬ﻋﻼﻣﺘﺎﻥ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺘﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺘﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﺎﻥ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺘﺎﻥ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫‪ Adobe Systems Incorporated‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺩﻭﻝ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ HDMI‬ﻭﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭ‪ High-Definition Multimedia Interface‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟـ ‪.HDMI Licensing, LLC‬‬
‫• ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ‪ Android‬ﻭ‪ Google Play‬ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Google Inc.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ‪ App Store‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Apple Inc.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ‪ iOS‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Cisco Systems, Inc.‬ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi Alliance‬‬
‫• ‪The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth‬‬
‫‪SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD. is under‬‬
‫‪license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺢ ®‪ Bluetooth‬ﻭﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻣﻤﻠﻮﻛﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫‪ Bluetooth SIG, Inc.‬ﻭﺃﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ‪CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺘﺮﺧﻴﺺ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻷﺻﺤﺎﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻴﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺢ ”ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ “QR‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ DENSO WAVE INCORPORATED‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﺎﺑﺎﻥ ﻭﺩﻭﻝ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ‪ EXILIM‬ﻭ‪ EXILIM Connect‬ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫‪.CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻷﺻﺤﺎﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻴﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳُﺤﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻧﺴﺦ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻷﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩ ﻣﻦ ‪ CASIO‬ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪205‬‬
‫ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ‬.
ً ‫ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺮﺧﺺ‬
.‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‬
OpenVG 1.1 Reference Implementation
Copyright (c) 2007 The Khronos Group Inc.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a
copy of this software and /or associated documentation files
(the "Materials "), to deal in the Materials without restriction,
including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge,
publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Materials,
and to permit persons to whom the Materials are furnished to do so,
subject to the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included
in all copies or substantial portions of the Materials.
THE MATERIALS ARE PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM,
DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR
OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE MATERIALS OR
THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE MATERIALS.
bluedroid 5.0.0_r2
Copyright (c) 2014 The Android Open Source Project
Copyright (C) 1998-2014 Broadcom Corporation
Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the "License");
you may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
You may obtain a copy of the License at
http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0
Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software
distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS,
WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.
See the License for the specific language governing permissions and
limitations under the License.
Apache License
Version 2.0, January 2004
http://www.apache.org/licenses/
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR USE, REPRODUCTION, AND DISTRIBUTION
1. Definitions.
"License" shall mean the terms and conditions for use, reproduction,
and distribution as defined by Sections 1 through 9 of this document.
"Licensor" shall mean the copyright owner or entity authorized by
the copyright owner that is granting the License.
206
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
"Legal Entity" shall mean the union of the acting entity and all
other entities that control, are controlled by, or are under common
control with that entity. For the purposes of this definition,
"control" means (i) the power, direct or indirect, to cause the
direction or management of such entity, whether by contract or
otherwise, or (ii) ownership of fifty percent (50%) or more of the
outstanding shares, or (iii) beneficial ownership of such entity.
"You" (or "Your") shall mean an individual or Legal Entity
exercising permissions granted by this License.
"Source" form shall mean the preferred form for making modifications,
including but not limited to software source code, documentation
source, and configuration files.
"Object" form shall mean any form resulting from mechanical
transformation or translation of a Source form, including but
not limited to compiled object code, generated documentation,
and conversions to other media types.
"Work" shall mean the work of authorship, whether in Source or
Object form, made available under the License, as indicated by a
copyright notice that is included in or attached to the work
(an example is provided in the Appendix below).
"Derivative Works" shall mean any work, whether in Source or Object
form, that is based on (or derived from) the Work and for which the
editorial revisions, annotations, elaborations, or other modifications
represent, as a whole, an original work of authorship. For the purposes
of this License, Derivative Works shall not include works that remain
separable from, or merely link (or bind by name) to the interfaces of,
the Work and Derivative Works thereof.
"Contribution" shall mean any work of authorship, including
the original version of the Work and any modifications or additions
to that Work or Derivative Works thereof, that is intentionally
submitted to Licensor for inclusion in the Work by the copyright owner
or by an individual or Legal Entity authorized to submit on behalf of
the copyright owner. For the purposes of this definition, "submitted"
means any form of electronic, verbal, or written communication sent
to the Licensor or its representatives, including but not limited to
communication on electronic mailing lists, source code control systems,
and issue tracking systems that are managed by, or on behalf of, the
Licensor for the purpose of discussing and improving the Work, but
excluding communication that is conspicuously marked or otherwise
designated in writing by the copyright owner as "Not a Contribution."
"Contributor" shall mean Licensor and any individual or Legal Entity
on behalf of whom a Contribution has been received by Licensor and
subsequently incorporated within the Work.
207
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
2. Grant of Copyright License. Subject to the terms and conditions of
this License, each Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual,
worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable
copyright license to reproduce, prepare Derivative Works of,
publicly display, publicly perform, sublicense, and distribute the
Work and such Derivative Works in Source or Object form.
3. Grant of Patent License. Subject to the terms and conditions of
this License, each Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual,
worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable
(except as stated in this section) patent license to make, have made,
use, offer to sell, sell, import, and otherwise transfer the Work,
where such license applies only to those patent claims licensable
by such Contributor that are necessarily infringed by their
Contribution(s) alone or by combination of their Contribution(s)
with the Work to which such Contribution(s) was submitted. If You
institute patent litigation against any entity (including a
cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that the Work
or a Contribution incorporated within the Work constitutes direct
or contributory patent infringement, then any patent licenses
granted to You under this License for that Work shall terminate
as of the date such litigation is filed.
4. Redistribution. You may reproduce and distribute copies of the
Work or Derivative Works thereof in any medium, with or without
modifications, and in Source or Object form, provided that You
meet the following conditions:
(a) You must give any other recipients of the Work or
Derivative Works a copy of this License; and
(b) You must cause any modified files to carry prominent notices
stating that You changed the files; and
(c) You must retain, in the Source form of any Derivative Works
that You distribute, all copyright, patent, trademark, and
attribution notices from the Source form of the Work,
excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of
the Derivative Works; and
(d) If the Work includes a "NOTICE" text file as part of its
distribution, then any Derivative Works that You distribute must
include a readable copy of the attribution notices contained
within such NOTICE file, excluding those notices that do not
pertain to any part of the Derivative Works, in at least one
of the following places: within a NOTICE text file distributed
as part of the Derivative Works; within the Source form or
documentation, if provided along with the Derivative Works; or,
within a display generated by the Derivative Works, if and
208
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
wherever such third-party notices normally appear. The contents
of the NOTICE file are for informational purposes only and
do not modify the License. You may add Your own attribution
notices within Derivative Works that You distribute, alongside
or as an addendum to the NOTICE text from the Work, provided
that such additional attribution notices cannot be construed
as modifying the License.
You may add Your own copyright statement to Your modifications and
may provide additional or different license terms and conditions
for use, reproduction, or distribution of Your modifications, or
for any such Derivative Works as a whole, provided Your use,
reproduction, and distribution of the Work otherwise complies with
the conditions stated in this License.
5. Submission of Contributions. Unless You explicitly state otherwise,
any Contribution intentionally submitted for inclusion in the Work
by You to the Licensor shall be under the terms and conditions of
this License, without any additional terms or conditions.
Notwithstanding the above, nothing herein shall supersede or modify
the terms of any separate license agreement you may have executed
with Licensor regarding such Contributions.
6. Trademarks. This License does not grant permission to use the trade
names, trademarks, service marks, or product names of the Licensor,
except as required for reasonable and customary use in describing the
origin of the Work and reproducing the content of the NOTICE file.
7. Disclaimer of Warranty. Unless required by applicable law or
agreed to in writing, Licensor provides the Work (and each
Contributor provides its Contributions) on an "AS IS" BASIS,
WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or
implied, including, without limitation, any warranties or conditions
of TITLE, NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, or FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. You are solely responsible for determining the
appropriateness of using or redistributing the Work and assume any
risks associated with Your exercise of permissions under this License.
8. Limitation of Liability. In no event and under no legal theory,
whether in tort (including negligence), contract, or otherwise,
unless required by applicable law (such as deliberate and grossly
negligent acts) or agreed to in writing, shall any Contributor be
liable to You for damages, including any direct, indirect, special,
incidental, or consequential damages of any character arising as a
result of this License or out of the use or inability to use the
Work (including but not limited to damages for loss of goodwill,
work stoppage, computer failure or malfunction, or any and all
other commercial damages or losses), even if such Contributor
has been advised of the possibility of such damages.
209
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
9. Accepting Warranty or Additional Liability. While redistributing
the Work or Derivative Works thereof, You may choose to offer,
and charge a fee for, acceptance of support, warranty, indemnity,
or other liability obligations and/or rights consistent with this
License. However, in accepting such obligations, You may act only
on Your own behalf and on Your sole responsibility, not on behalf
of any other Contributor, and only if You agree to indemnify,
defend, and hold each Contributor harmless for any liability
incurred by, or claims asserted against, such Contributor by reason
of your accepting any such warranty or additional liability.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
bluedroid 5.0.0_r2
Copyright (c) 1998-2008, Brian Gladman, Worcester, UK. All rights reserved.
LICENSE TERMS
The redistribution and use of this software (with or without changes)
is allowed without the payment of fees or royalties provided that:
1. source code distributions include the above copyright notice, this
list of conditions and the following disclaimer;
2. binary distributions include the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer in their documentation;
3. the name of the copyright holder is not used to endorse products
built using this software without specific written permission.
DISCLAIMER
This software is provided 'as is' with no explicit or implied warranties
in respect of its properties, including, but not limited to, correctness
and/or fitness for purpose.
libhardware 5.0.0_r2
Copyright (c) 2005-2014, The Android Open Source Project
Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the "License");
you may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
You may obtain a copy of the License at
http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0
Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software
distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS,
WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.
210
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
See the License for the specific language governing permissions and
limitations under the License.
Apache License
Version 2.0, January 2004
http://www.apache.org/licenses/
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR USE, REPRODUCTION, AND DISTRIBUTION
1. Definitions.
"License" shall mean the terms and conditions for use, reproduction,
and distribution as defined by Sections 1 through 9 of this document.
"Licensor" shall mean the copyright owner or entity authorized by
the copyright owner that is granting the License.
"Legal Entity" shall mean the union of the acting entity and all
other entities that control, are controlled by, or are under common
control with that entity. For the purposes of this definition,
"control" means (i) the power, direct or indirect, to cause the
direction or management of such entity, whether by contract or
otherwise, or (ii) ownership of fifty percent (50%) or more of the
outstanding shares, or (iii) beneficial ownership of such entity.
"You" (or "Your") shall mean an individual or Legal Entity
exercising permissions granted by this License.
"Source" form shall mean the preferred form for making modifications,
including but not limited to software source code, documentation
source, and configuration files.
"Object" form shall mean any form resulting from mechanical
transformation or translation of a Source form, including but
not limited to compiled object code, generated documentation,
and conversions to other media types.
"Work" shall mean the work of authorship, whether in Source or
Object form, made available under the License, as indicated by a
copyright notice that is included in or attached to the work
(an example is provided in the Appendix below).
"Derivative Works" shall mean any work, whether in Source or Object
form, that is based on (or derived from) the Work and for which the
editorial revisions, annotations, elaborations, or other modifications
represent, as a whole, an original work of authorship. For the purposes
of this License, Derivative Works shall not include works that remain
separable from, or merely link (or bind by name) to the interfaces of,
the Work and Derivative Works thereof.
"Contribution" shall mean any work of authorship, including
the original version of the Work and any modifications or additions
to that Work or Derivative Works thereof, that is intentionally
211
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
submitted to Licensor for inclusion in the Work by the copyright owner
or by an individual or Legal Entity authorized to submit on behalf of
the copyright owner. For the purposes of this definition, "submitted"
means any form of electronic, verbal, or written communication sent
to the Licensor or its representatives, including but not limited to
communication on electronic mailing lists, source code control systems,
and issue tracking systems that are managed by, or on behalf of, the
Licensor for the purpose of discussing and improving the Work, but
excluding communication that is conspicuously marked or otherwise
designated in writing by the copyright owner as "Not a Contribution."
"Contributor" shall mean Licensor and any individual or Legal Entity
on behalf of whom a Contribution has been received by Licensor and
subsequently incorporated within the Work.
2. Grant of Copyright License. Subject to the terms and conditions of
this License, each Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual,
worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable
copyright license to reproduce, prepare Derivative Works of,
publicly display, publicly perform, sublicense, and distribute the
Work and such Derivative Works in Source or Object form.
3. Grant of Patent License. Subject to the terms and conditions of
this License, each Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual,
worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable
(except as stated in this section) patent license to make, have made,
use, offer to sell, sell, import, and otherwise transfer the Work,
where such license applies only to those patent claims licensable
by such Contributor that are necessarily infringed by their
Contribution(s) alone or by combination of their Contribution(s)
with the Work to which such Contribution(s) was submitted. If You
institute patent litigation against any entity (including a
cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that the Work
or a Contribution incorporated within the Work constitutes direct
or contributory patent infringement, then any patent licenses
granted to You under this License for that Work shall terminate
as of the date such litigation is filed.
4. Redistribution. You may reproduce and distribute copies of the
Work or Derivative Works thereof in any medium, with or without
modifications, and in Source or Object form, provided that You
meet the following conditions:
(a) You must give any other recipients of the Work or
Derivative Works a copy of this License; and
(b) You must cause any modified files to carry prominent notices
stating that You changed the files; and
(c) You must retain, in the Source form of any Derivative Works
that You distribute, all copyright, patent, trademark, and
attribution notices from the Source form of the Work,
212
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of
the Derivative Works; and
(d) If the Work includes a "NOTICE" text file as part of its
distribution, then any Derivative Works that You distribute must
include a readable copy of the attribution notices contained
within such NOTICE file, excluding those notices that do not
pertain to any part of the Derivative Works, in at least one
of the following places: within a NOTICE text file distributed
as part of the Derivative Works; within the Source form or
documentation, if provided along with the Derivative Works; or,
within a display generated by the Derivative Works, if and
wherever such third-party notices normally appear. The contents
of the NOTICE file are for informational purposes only and
do not modify the License. You may add Your own attribution
notices within Derivative Works that You distribute, alongside
or as an addendum to the NOTICE text from the Work, provided
that such additional attribution notices cannot be construed
as modifying the License.
You may add Your own copyright statement to Your modifications and
may provide additional or different license terms and conditions
for use, reproduction, or distribution of Your modifications, or
for any such Derivative Works as a whole, provided Your use,
reproduction, and distribution of the Work otherwise complies with
the conditions stated in this License.
5. Submission of Contributions. Unless You explicitly state otherwise,
any Contribution intentionally submitted for inclusion in the Work
by You to the Licensor shall be under the terms and conditions of
this License, without any additional terms or conditions.
Notwithstanding the above, nothing herein shall supersede or modify
the terms of any separate license agreement you may have executed
with Licensor regarding such Contributions.
6. Trademarks. This License does not grant permission to use the trade
names, trademarks, service marks, or product names of the Licensor,
except as required for reasonable and customary use in describing the
origin of the Work and reproducing the content of the NOTICE file.
7. Disclaimer of Warranty. Unless required by applicable law or
agreed to in writing, Licensor provides the Work (and each
Contributor provides its Contributions) on an "AS IS" BASIS,
WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or
implied, including, without limitation, any warranties or conditions
of TITLE, NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, or FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. You are solely responsible for determining the
appropriateness of using or redistributing the Work and assume any
risks associated with Your exercise of permissions under this License.
213
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
8. Limitation of Liability. In no event and under no legal theory,
whether in tort (including negligence), contract, or otherwise,
unless required by applicable law (such as deliberate and grossly
negligent acts) or agreed to in writing, shall any Contributor be
liable to You for damages, including any direct, indirect, special,
incidental, or consequential damages of any character arising as a
result of this License or out of the use or inability to use the
Work (including but not limited to damages for loss of goodwill,
work stoppage, computer failure or malfunction, or any and all
other commercial damages or losses), even if such Contributor
has been advised of the possibility of such damages.
9. Accepting Warranty or Additional Liability. While redistributing
the Work or Derivative Works thereof, You may choose to offer,
and charge a fee for, acceptance of support, warranty, indemnity,
or other liability obligations and/or rights consistent with this
License. However, in accepting such obligations, You may act only
on Your own behalf and on Your sole responsibility, not on behalf
of any other Contributor, and only if You agree to indemnify,
defend, and hold each Contributor harmless for any liability
incurred by, or claims asserted against, such Contributor by reason
of your accepting any such warranty or additional liability.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
214
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺑﺪﺃ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪...‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻷﺣﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺘﺎﺩ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٥‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪٣٥‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻭﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻐﺮﺍﻕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٥‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٦٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (١‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﻨﺬ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (٢‬ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ ‪ .USB 2.0‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ ‪ ٥٠٠‬ﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺴﻌﺔ ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺛﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺇﻧﻚ ﻗﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ ٥‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺄﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ CASIO‬ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪215‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻳﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻮﻓﺮﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎً ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻮﻓﺮﻩ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺮﺟﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٥‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣٥‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻭﻗﺘﺎً ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﺰﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻼ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﺍً ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺄﺧﺮﻯ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺪﻫﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺨﻄﻂ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﻨﻔﺬ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺷﺤﻨﺘﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎً ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻔﺮﻍ ﺷﺤﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﺎً ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﺸﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺎﺟﺘﻚ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺭﺩ ﻭﺟﺎﻑ )‪ ٢٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺮﻳﻎ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻨﻔﺎﺫ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻛﻞ ﺳﺘﺔ ﺃﺷﻬﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﺧﺮ‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫• ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪٢٤٠‬‬
‫ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪ ٦٠/٥٠ ،‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺻﻄﺤﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﺭﺣﻠﺔ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻭﻛﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ )ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺎﺕ( ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﺼﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﻓﻮﻟﺘﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻬﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﻋﻄﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ‬
‫• ﻳُﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺻﻄﺤﺎﺏ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ )‪ (NP-160‬ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﻋﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﺮﺍﻍ ﺷﺤﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪216‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 26‬ﻟﻺﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﻭﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ SD‬ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ SDHC‬ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‬
‫‪ SDXC‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻤﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ SD‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺑﺪﺃﺕ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺘﺎﺩﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫‪ .(193‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳُﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺻﻄﺤﺎﺑﻚ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎً ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺍً ﻋﻦ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻚ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻣﻜﺘﺒﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍً ﻟﻘﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻔﻘﺪ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ‪ ،‬ﻳُﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺩﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻭﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎء ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻈﻮﺍﻫﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎً ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )‪ CD-R‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ CD-RW‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺑﻄﺎء ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ‪ .‬ﻣﺘﻰ ﺃﻣﻜﻦ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻓﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻓﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻀﻲء ‪ Y‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪217‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻨﻬﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺘﺎ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺒﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺎﺗﻘﻚ‪ .‬ﻳُﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺗﺨﺎﺫ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺨﻠﺼﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻠﻚ ﻟﻤﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺨﻠﺼﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻄﻴﻢ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﻨﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﻟﻠﺤﺬﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (193‬ﻟﻠﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪218‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ([MENU‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(193‬ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﺔ )–( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻻ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫• ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪r REC MENU .‬‬
‫‪CS‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﺱ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻀﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺣﺪّﺓ‬
‫ﺇﺷﺒﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺯﻭﻭﻡ )‪(SR‬‬
‫ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺗﻌﺰﻳﺰ ‪AF‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪HDR‬‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺡ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ T :‬ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪:‬‬
‫‪3M‬‬
‫ﻻﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫ﻻﻗﻂ ﺃﻣﺎﻣﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ‪ /‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬
‫‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺣﺪ ‪ ISO‬ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫‪Make-up‬‬
‫‪ AF‬ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ‪– :WLAN‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ‪– :‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‪ :‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪0.0‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪AF‬‬
‫‪ U‬ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻲ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ‪) 0 :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫ﺑﺸﺮﺓ ﻣﺘﺠﺎﻧﺴﺔ‪) 0 :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪219‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪16M‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫‪FHD‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫ﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺷﺒﻜﺔ‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪/‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﺭﺝ ﺇﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪/‬‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫‪ :CS‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪/‬‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪/‬‬
‫‪ :ISO‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪/‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪/‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪ :AF‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪/‬‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﺱ‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪/‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪/‬‬
‫ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪/‬‬
‫ﺯﻭﻭﻡ )‪ :(SR‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪/‬‬
‫ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪/‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‪:‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪/‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪p PLAY MENU .‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬
‫ﻻﻗﻂ ﺃﻣﺎﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺇﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺩﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪MOTION PRINT‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ /‬ﻭﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺴﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺦ‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪ CS‬ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫–‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ‪ :‬ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ 30 :‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ‪/‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‪ 3 :‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪/‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪1‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪219‬‬
‫‪DPOF‬‬
‫‪220‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪10M‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪¥ SETTING .‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ECO‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﺻﻮﺕ ‪/ 1‬‬
‫ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪ :‬ﺻﻮﺕ ‪/ 1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪ :‬ﺻﻮﺕ ‪/ 1‬‬
‫ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺻﻮﺕ ‪/ 1‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪/ 3 :‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪3 :‬‬
‫–‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪ 5‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪PLAY‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻋﺎﻟﻤﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫‪Language‬‬
‫ﺧﺮﺝ‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫‪HDMI‬‬
‫‪221‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﺴﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺮﺍﻡ‪...‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (١‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫‪ (٢‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺤﻦ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(20‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻬﻰ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﺮﻫﺎ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻭﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺮﺍء‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ‪ CASIO NP-160‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﺠﺄﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (١‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(189‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (٢‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺤﻦ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(20‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫‪ (٣‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ً‬
‫ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺒﺮﺩ ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺯﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪.(19‬‬
‫ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻀﻲء ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‬
‫ﻭﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺛﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺛﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(20‬‬
‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (١‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (٢‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (٣‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ“‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﻚ ﻭﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻌﺪ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ‪ (١‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺴﺨﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻔﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (٢‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻼﺋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (٣‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(38‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(44‬‬
‫‪ (٤‬ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻀﺎﺩ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪222‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻼﺋﻢ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (١‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ? )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ﻛﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺁﺧﺮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(49‬‬
‫‪ (٢‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺾ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻨﻬﺎ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(20‬‬
‫‪ (٣‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ‪ BEST SHOT‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ? )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺁﺧﺮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (49‬ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ‪BEST SHOT‬‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(82‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ? )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺧﻠﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ CASIO‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻦ ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﺯﺍﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (١‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻚ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻭﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(44‬‬
‫‪ (٢‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻚ ´ )ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ( ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﻬﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﺖ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(44‬‬
‫‪ (٣‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ ﺟﺪﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ´ )ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ( ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺮﺑﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(44‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (١‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺩﺍﻛﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﺃﺩﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻓﺮﺻﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺣﺎً ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (٢‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﻈﻠﻢ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ? )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎء ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻤﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﺭﺩﻱء‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (49‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ‬
‫ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (٣‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (113‬ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎء ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺣﺎً ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (٤‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﻧﺴﺒﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ )ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﻀﻴﺌﺔ(‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺑﺮﻭﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺩﻋﻬﺎ ﺗﺒﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﻜﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫‪223‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (١‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﻆ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﻇﻬﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(24‬‬
‫‪ (٢‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻔﻆ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﻆ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺿﻮء ﻛﺎﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫< )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (49‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ‪) +‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(48‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺟﻴﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ‪ BEST SHOT‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (82‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻴﻼً‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻟﻴﻠﻲ ‪) HS‬ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫• ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻟﻴﻠﻲ ﻭﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﺖ ‪) HS‬ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻟﻴﻠﻲ(‬
‫ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻌﻜﺲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﻠﻴﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺇﻟﻰ < )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‬
‫ﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (49‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﻃﺊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻟﺞ‪ .‬ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ‪) +‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(48‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺄﻗﺼﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (١‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(114‬‬
‫‪ (٢‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺑﺄﻗﺼﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﻪ ﻟﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﺯﻭﻭﻡ )‪“(SR‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ”ﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ“‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(55‬‬
‫‪ (٣‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺑﺄﻗﺼﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﺷﻲء ﺧﻼﻑ ”‪ .“3M‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(109‬‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (١‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻣﻤﻜﻨًﺎ ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (٢‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﺘﺴﺨﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(203‬‬
‫‪ (٣‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺜﺒﺘًﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎً ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎً ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻔﺎﺟﺊ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻨﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﻘًﺎ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺒﻌﺾ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪224‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻇﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻧﻌﻜﺎﺱ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺿﻮء ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻻ ﻳﻨﻌﻜﺲ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻏﻴﺮ ‪ DCF‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫)ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫• ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫• ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫• ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (١‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻣﺤﻤﻲ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(144‬‬
‫‪ (٢‬ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ“ ﻋﻠﻰ ”ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ“‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﻣﻤﻜﻦ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(190‬‬
‫‪MOTION PRINT‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻨﻲ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (١‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺎ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﻳﻦ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺃﺣﺪﻫﻤﺎ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (٢‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(155‬‬
‫‪ (٣‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﻢ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ ﻓﺮﻥ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻭﻳﻒ ﻗﺮﻳﺐ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﻴﺪًﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪ (١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﻤﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (٢‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(167‬‬
‫‪ (٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪225‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(191‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻄﺄ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(192‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻠﻐﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪ (١‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﺃﻥ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ‪.USB‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (٢‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻮﺻﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫‪ (٣‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ً‬
‫ﻋﺒﺮ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻙ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ًﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ‬
‫‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (٤‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ USB‬ﻣﻤﻜﻨًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻫﻮ‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (١‬ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺷﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪.(192 ،25‬‬
‫‪ (٢‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(193‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻌﺪ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻈﻬﻮﺭ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ CASIO‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ (DISP) [8‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(11‬‬
‫‪226‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(25‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ ٢٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺷﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٢٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺃﻗﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺧﻠﻞ ﺑﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ CASIO‬ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺠﻴﺐ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓً‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﺠﻴﺐ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪227‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬
‫”ﺻﻮﺭ“‬
‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪ .‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﺻﻮﺭ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (135‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(193‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫• ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻷﻱ‬
‫ﺳﺒﺐ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻷﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﺖ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ‪ ٩٩٩٩‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎً ﻣﺨﺰﻧﺎً ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ .٩٩٩‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻌﺪ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(36‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺘﻰ ﻗﺎﻣﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ CASIO‬ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻋﻄﻞ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻀﺎﺩ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﻧﻔﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫‪ CASIO‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻌﺪ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(36‬‬
‫ﺳﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺯﺍﺋﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ً‬
‫ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺒﺮﺩ ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪228‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﻣﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﺻﻄﺪﻣﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻌﺎﺋﻖ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﻖ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺸﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﻣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻘﻔﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ SD‬ﺃﻭ ‪ SDHC‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻘﻔﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﻌﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺇﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ً‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻟﻺﻧﺸﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(193‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﻓﺘﺤﻪ ﺗﺎﻟﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪SDXC‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪229‬‬
‫‪LOCK‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪/‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺧﺎﻃﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪16M‬‬
‫)‪(٣٤٥٦x٤٦٠٨‬‬
‫‪3:2‬‬
‫)‪(٣٠٧٢x٤٦٠٨‬‬
‫‪16:9‬‬
‫)‪(٢٥٩٢x٤٦٠٨‬‬
‫‪10M‬‬
‫)‪(٢٧٣٦x٣٦٤٨‬‬
‫‪3M‬‬
‫)‪(١٥٣٦x٢٠٤٨‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪٢*SD‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫*‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ‬
‫ﺟﻴﺪ‬
‫‪ ١٠٫٧١‬ﻡ ﺏ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪١٠٧٢‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫‪ ٥٫٥٧‬ﻡ ﺏ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪١٦٥٤‬‬
‫ﺟﻴﺪ‬
‫‪ ٩٫٤٣‬ﻡ ﺏ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪١٢١٤‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫‪ ٤٫٩٢‬ﻡ ﺏ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪١٨٧٣‬‬
‫ﺟﻴﺪ‬
‫‪ ٧٫٨٣‬ﻡ ﺏ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪١٤٦٦‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫‪ ٤٫١‬ﻡ ﺏ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٢٢٢١‬‬
‫ﺟﻴﺪ‬
‫‪ ٦٫٤‬ﻡ ﺏ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪١٧٨٧‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫‪ ٣٫٣٨‬ﻡ ﺏ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٢٧٢٨‬‬
‫ﺟﻴﺪ‬
‫‪ ٢٫٠‬ﻡ ﺏ‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٤٦٦٩‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫‪ ١٫٢٥‬ﻡ ﺏ‬
‫‪230‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫‪٦٥٣٣‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻼﺕ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‬
‫‪FHD‬‬
‫)‪(١٠٨٠x١٩٢٠‬‬
‫)ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ(‬
‫‪HD‬‬
‫)‪(٧٢٠x١٢٨٠‬‬
‫)ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ(‬
‫‪STD‬‬
‫)‪(٤٨٠x٦٤٠‬‬
‫)ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ(‬
‫‪HS1000‬‬
‫)‪(٦٤x٢٢٤‬‬
‫)ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺻﻮﺕ(‬
‫‪HS480‬‬
‫)‪(١٦٠x٢٢٤‬‬
‫)ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺻﻮﺕ(‬
‫‪HS240‬‬
‫)‪(٣٨٤x٥١٢‬‬
‫)ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺻﻮﺕ(‬
‫‪HS120‬‬
‫)‪(٤٨٠x٦٤٠‬‬
‫)ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺻﻮﺕ(‬
‫‪HS30-240‬‬
‫)‪(٣٨٤x٥١٢‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪٣٠‬‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪HS30-120‬‬
‫)‪(٤٨٠x٦٤٠‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪٣٠‬‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ‬
‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺪﺗﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ*‪ ١‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ‬
‫*‪٣‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪ ١٤٫٢‬ﻡ ﺏ‪/‬ﺙ‬
‫)‪ ٣٠‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ(‬
‫‪ ١٤‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫*‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺘﺎﻥ‬
‫‪ ١٤‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٠٦٫٥‬ﻡ ﺏ‬
‫‪ ٢٩‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٠٫٩‬ﻡ ﺏ‪/‬ﺙ‬
‫)‪٣٠ ،٢٠ ،١٥ ،١٢‬‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ(‬
‫‪ ١٩‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫*‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺘﺎﻥ‬
‫‪ ٥٦‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫*‬
‫‪ ٨١٫٨‬ﻡ ﺏ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫*‬
‫‪ ٢٩‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫*‬
‫‪ ٣٫٨‬ﻡ ﺏ‪/‬ﺙ‬
‫)‪ ٣٠‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ(‬
‫‪ ٥٥‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٣٣‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٩٫٣‬ﻡ ﺏ‬
‫‪ ٢٩‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٤٠٫٠‬ﻡ ﺏ‪/‬ﺙ‬
‫)‪ ١٠٠٠‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ(‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫*‬
‫‪ ٤٨‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٣٠٠٫٠‬ﻡ ﺏ‬
‫‪ ١٣‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٠‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫‪ ٤٠٫٠‬ﻡ ﺏ‪/‬ﺙ‬
‫)‪ ٤٨٠‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ(‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫*‬
‫‪ ٤٨‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٣٠٠٫٠‬ﻡ ﺏ‬
‫‪ ١٣‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ‬
‫)ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ(‬
‫‪ ٤٠٫٠‬ﻡ ﺏ‪/‬ﺙ‬
‫)‪ ٢٤٠‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ‬
‫ﻟﺤﺠﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺝ ﺏ ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ ٢٩‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪*SD‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫*‬
‫‪ ٤٨‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٣٠٠٫٠‬ﻡ ﺏ‬
‫‪ ١٢‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٥٨‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ ٤٠٫٠‬ﻡ ﺏ‪/‬ﺙ‬
‫)‪ ١٢٠‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ(‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫*‬
‫‪ ٤٧‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٣٠٠٫٠‬ﻡ ﺏ‬
‫‪ ١٢‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٥٥‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ ٥٫٢‬ﻡ ﺏ‪/‬ﺙ‬
‫)‪ ٣٠‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ(‬
‫‪ ٤٠٫٤‬ﻡ ﺏ‪/‬ﺙ‬
‫)‪ ٢٤٠‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ(‬
‫‪ ٤٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫*‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ١٠‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫*‬
‫‪ ٣٩٫٠‬ﻡ ﺏ‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫*‬
‫‪ ١٠٫٢‬ﻡ ﺏ‪/‬ﺙ‬
‫)‪ ٣٠‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ(‬
‫‪ ٤٠٫٤‬ﻡ ﺏ‪/‬ﺙ‬
‫)‪ ١٢٠‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ(‬
‫‪ ٢٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫*‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫*‬
‫‪ ٧٦٫٥‬ﻡ ﺏ‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫*‬
‫‪ ٢٩‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫*‬
‫‪ ٢٩‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫*‬
‫*‪ ١‬ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ )ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٢٧٫٦‬ﻡ ﺏ(‬
‫*‪ ٢‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ SDHC‬ﺳﻌﺔ ‪ ١٦‬ﺝ ﺏ )ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ .(SanDisk Corporation‬ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪231‬‬
‫*‪٣‬‬
‫*‪٤‬‬
‫*‪٥‬‬
‫*‪٦‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻪ ﺃﻗﺼﺮ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ SD‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ FHD‬ﻭ‪ .HS‬ﻣﺘﻰ ﺃﻣﻜﻦ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ Ultra‬ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪.(72 ،26‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.Art Shot‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٢٠‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ٢٤٠‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻴﻢ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻫﻲ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻴﻢ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻫﻲ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺴﻌﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻛﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﻝ ‪ ١٦‬ﺝ ﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻗﻪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻗﻪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪ ٢٤٠‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ ١٠‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ‪ ٨٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪232‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪:‬‬
‫‪ Exif) JPEG‬ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪2.3‬؛ ‪ DCF 2.0‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ؛ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ‪(DPOF‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ H.264/AVC ،MOV‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪) IMA-ADPCM ،‬ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ(‬
‫ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺪﻣﺠﺔ )ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ٢٧٫٦ :‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ*(‬
‫‪SD/SDHC/SDXC‬‬
‫* ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪:‬‬
‫‪، (٢٥٩٢x٤٦٠٨) 16:9 ،(٣٠٧٢x٤٦٠٨) 3:2 ،(٣٤٥٦x٤٦٠٨) 16M‬‬
‫‪(١٥٣٦x٢٠٤٨) 3M ،(٢٧٣٦x٣٦٤٨) 10M‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ٣٠ ١٠٨٠x١٩٢٠) FHD‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ(‪،‬‬
‫‪ ١٢ ٧٢٠x١٢٨٠) HD‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ‪ ١٥/‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ‪ ٢٠/‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ ‪ ٣٠/‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ(*‪،‬‬
‫‪ ٣٠ ٤٨٠x٦٤٠) STD‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ(‪ ١٠٠٠ ٦٤x٢٢٤) HS1000 ،‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ(‪،‬‬
‫‪ ٤٨٠ ١٦٠x٢٢٤) HS480‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ(‪،‬‬
‫‪ ٢٤٠ ٣٨٤x٥١٢) HS240‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ(‪،‬‬
‫‪ ١٢٠ ٤٨٠x٦٤٠) HS120‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ(‪،‬‬
‫‪ ٣٠ ٣٨٤x٥١٢) HS30-240‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ‪ ٢٤٠/‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ(‪،‬‬
‫‪ ٣٠ ٤٨٠x٦٤٠) HS30-120‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ‪ ١٢٠/‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ(‬
‫* ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ HD‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ Art Shot‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ‬
‫ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٦٫١‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ٢٫٣/١‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ )ﺑﺈﺿﺎءﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻼﺕ‪ ١٦٫٧٩ :‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫)‪ F3.5 (W‬ﺇﻟﻰ )‪ ٤٫٥ = f 6.5 (T‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤٥٫٠‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫)ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻟـ ‪ ٢٥‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٢٥٠‬ﻣﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ ٣٥‬ﻣﻢ(‬
‫ﺯﻭﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﺑﺼﺮﻱ ‪ 20.0X ،10.0X‬ﻣﻊ ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ‪ SR‬ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺃﻭ ‪ 4X‬ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 89.8X‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ‪ HD‬ﻭﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻣﻌًﺎ )ﺣﺠﻢ ‪(3M‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ؛ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﺰﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫• ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ‪ ،‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬
‫• ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ )‪ ٢٥‬ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ(‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﺒﻊ‬
‫‪CMOS‬‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ٥ :‬ﺳﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) 9‬ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻛﺮﻭ ‪ ٥ :‬ﺳﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٥٠‬ﺳﻢ )ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ(‬
‫)ﻣﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ(‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‪ ٥ :‬ﺳﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) 9‬ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ(‬
‫• ﻳﺘﺄﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﺱ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻭﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻭﻣﻮﺿﻌﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪233‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬
‫‪ –2.0EV‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) +2.0EV‬ﺑﺘﺪﺭﻳﺞ ‪(1/3EV‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‬
‫ﻻﻗﻂ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ )ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺒﺮﻣﺞ(‪ ٤/١ :‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٠٠٠/١‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ )ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ(‪ ٤ :‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤٠٠٠/١‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫)‪ F3.5 (W‬ﺇﻟﻰ )‪) F11.1 (W‬ﻣﻊ ﻓﻠﺘﺮ ‪(ND‬‬
‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻏﺎﺋﻢ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻇﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ‬
‫ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﺠﺴﺘﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫)ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺧﺮﺝ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪،ISO 400 ،ISO 200 ،ISO 100 ،ISO 80 ،‬‬
‫‪ISO 3200 ،ISO 1600 ،ISO 800‬‬
‫ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ )ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻟﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ(‪:‬‬
‫‪ ISO 25600‬ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ :‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺧﻔﺾ ﺍﺣﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫)ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ :ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫‪ ٠٫٤‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٢٫٩‬ﻡ )ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ(‬
‫‪ ١٫٥‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٫٦‬ﻡ )ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ(‬
‫• ﻳﺘﺄﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ‪.‬‬
‫‪CMOS‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﻻﻗﻂ ﻣﻴﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫–‪٢+ ،١+ ،٠ ،١– ،٢‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﻦ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫‪:Bluetooth‬‬
‫• ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪:‬‬
‫‪:Wi-Fi‬‬
‫• ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪IEEE 802.11b/g/n :‬‬
‫• ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ١ :‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١١‬ﻗﻨﺎﺓ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ‪WPA2 :‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺑﺄﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪ ٣٫٠ TFT‬ﺑﻮﺻﺎﺕ )ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ(‬
‫‪ ٩٢١٫٦٠٠‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻺﻣﺎﻟﺔ )‪ ١٨٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ(‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ )ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ‪ USB‬ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪(USB‬‬
‫ﺧﺮﺝ ‪) HDMI‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪(D‬‬
‫‪Bluetooth® Smart‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ )‪١ x (NP-160‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪234‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﻗﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ )‪ ٢٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ( ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﻤﻮﻧﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻠﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ )ﺯﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(*‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ )‪*(ECO‬‬
‫‪ ٢٨٠‬ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٣٤٠‬ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ )ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪*(FHD‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ )ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪*(FHD‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭ‪ ٣٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫)‪٢ (HS 240‬‬
‫(*‬
‫)ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭ‪ ٤٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ*‪) ٢‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪(٣*FHD‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺘﺎﻥ ﻭ ‪ ٥٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ )ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ(*‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻭ‪ ٤٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‪ ٢٣ :‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪) NP-160 :‬ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺭﺓ‪ ١٢٠٠ :‬ﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ(‬
‫• ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ SDHC‬ﺳﻌﺔ ‪ ١٦‬ﺝ ﺏ )ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪(SanDisk Corporation‬‬
‫*‪ ١‬ﻭﻓﻘﺎً ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ‪) CIPA‬ﺍﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‬
‫*‪ ٢‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ‪CASIO‬‬
‫*‪ ٣‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ » :‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ٢/١ :‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﻜﻮﻥ‪ :‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫*‪ ٤‬ﺗﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻛﻞ ‪ ١٠‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫• ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺤﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﻛﻤﺮﺟﻊ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻭﺯﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺣﻴﺜﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺯﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ‪ ٣٫٧‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‪ ٥٫٠ ،‬ﻭﺍﺕ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬
‫‪) ٩٩٫٦‬ﻋﺮﺽ( ‪) ٥٩٫٥‬ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ( ‪) ٢٥٫٠‬ﻋﻤﻖ( ﻣﻢ‬
‫)ﺳﻤﻚ ‪ ٢٤٫٧‬ﻣﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺯﺓ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬
‫‪ ٢٠٢‬ﺟﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ )ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ*(‬
‫‪ ١٧٥‬ﺟﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ(‬
‫* ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ SDHC‬ﺳﻌﺔ ‪ ١٦‬ﺝ ﺏ )ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪(SanDisk Corporation‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪x‬‬
‫‪x‬‬
‫‪235‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ )‪(NP-160‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﻟﺘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ ٣٫٧‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ ١٢٠٠‬ﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬
‫‪) ٣٧٫٥‬ﻋﺮﺽ( ‪) ٤٤٫٩ x‬ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ( ‪) ٧٫٠ x‬ﻋﻤﻖ( ﻣﻢ‬
‫)ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺯﺓ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬
‫‪ ٢٥‬ﺟﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ .‬ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ )‪(AD-C53U‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫‪ ١٠٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٢٤٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩ‪ ٦٠/٥٠ ،‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ ١٠٠ ،‬ﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ‬
‫‪ ٥٫٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪ ٦٥٠ ،‬ﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣٥‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬
‫‪) ٥٣‬ﻋﺮﺽ( ‪) ٢١ x‬ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ( ‪) ٤٥ x‬ﻋﻤﻖ( ﻣﻢ‬
‫)ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺯﺓ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬
‫‪ ٣٧‬ﺟﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪236‬‬
CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD.
6-2, Hon-machi 1-chome
Shibuya-ku, Tokyo 151-8543, Japan
M29
MA1606-A
2016
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising